The Varispeed L7 DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off. To avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out maintenance. Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out.

Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the inverter. It contains semiconductors, which are not designed for such high voltages.

Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on. The printed circuit board must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power.

Never connect general LC/RC interference suppression filters, capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the inverter input or output.

To avoid unnecessary overcurrent faults, etc, being displayed, the signaling contacts of any contactor or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic (eg baseblock).

This is absolutely imperative!

This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter. All safety precautions and instructions for use must be followed.

The inverter must be operated with the appropriate line filters, following the installation instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered.

Only then will adequate protection be provided. Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.

VII

VIII

Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use

1. General

Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this inverter. Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed.

Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation. Removal of housing components, the digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installation or operation. The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give rise to other dangers.

The instructions in this manual must be followed. Installation, operation and maintenance may only be carried out by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety precautions, qualified personnel are defined as individuals who are familiar with the installation, starting, operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and have the proper qualifications for this work. Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used properly for their intended purpose.

The DC bus capacitors can remain live for about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power.

It is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers. All of the main circuit terminals may still carry dangerous voltages.

Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters.

Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with any form of access to the inverters.

2. Intended Use

Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.

Their installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive:

EN 50178, 1997-10, Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices

EN 60204-1, 1997-12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices

Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)/

Please note: Includes Corrigendum of September 1998

EN 61010-1, A2, 1995 Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 950, 1991 + A1, 1992 + A2, 1993 + A3, 1995 + A4, 1996, modified)

CE marking is carried out to EN 50178, using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions.

3. Transportation and storage

The instructions for transportation, storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the technical data.

4. Installation

Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation. The cooling air must flow in the specified direction. The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position (e.g. upright). Maintain the specified clearances. Protect the inverters against impermissible loads. Components must not be bent nor insulation clearances changed. To avoid damage being caused by static electricity, do not touch any electronic components or contacts.

5. Electrical Connection

Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regulations. Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations. In particular, follow the installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), e.g. shielding, grounding, filter arrangement and laying of cables. This also applies to equipment with the CE mark. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits.

Your supplier or OYMC representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency inverters.

In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.

6. Notes

The Varispeed L7 frequency inverters are certified to CE, UL, and c-UL.

EMC Compatibility

1. Introduction

This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using OYMC frequency inverters to design and install electrical switch gear. It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive. The manual's installation and wiring instructions must therefore be followed.

Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below.

Product standard: EN 61800-3:1996

EN 61800-3; A11:2000

2. Measures to Ensure Conformity of OYMC Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive

OYMC frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet.

It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible types of installation. This manual therefore has to be limited to general guidelines.

All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The cables pass this on to the environment like an aerial.

Connecting an item of electrical equipment (e.g. drive) to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF or LF interference to get into the mains.

The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding and shielding of cables.

A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable.

Moreover, cable shields must be connected with purpose-made ground clips.

3. Laying Cables

Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:

Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible.

Use a power cable with well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length.

Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal (e.g.

metal plate).

Shielded Cable:

– Use a cable with braided shield.

– Ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see following figure).

Ground clip Ground plate

The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any coats of varnish and paint.

– Ground the cable shields at both ends.

– Ground the motor of the machine.

XII

Line Filters

Recommended Line Filters for Varispeed L7

Inverter Model

Varispeed L7

CIMR-L7Z43P77

CIMR-L7Z44P07

CIMR-L7Z45P57

CIMR-L7Z47P57

CIMR-L7Z40117

CIMR-L7Z40157

CIMR-L7Z40187

CIMR-L7Z40227

CIMR-L7Z40307

CIMR-L7Z40377

CIMR-L7Z40457

CIMR-L7Z40557

Model

3G3RV-PFI3018-SE

3G3RV-PFI3035-SE

3G3RV-PFI3060-SE

3G3RV-PFI3070-SE

3G3RV-PFI3130-SE

Line Filter

Current

(A)

Weight

(kg)

130

1.3

2.1

4.0

3.4

4.7

Dimensions

W x D x H

141 x 46 x 330

206 x 50 x 355

236 x 65 x 408

80 x 185 x 329

90 x 180 x 366

Maximum Voltage

Ambient Temperature

: AC 480V 3phase

: 45°C (max.)

* Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment (EN61800-3, A11)

(general availability, 1st environment)

Inverter Model

Varispeed L7

CIMR-L7Z23P77

CIMR-L7Z25P57

CIMR-L7Z27P57

CIMR-L7Z20117

CIMR-L7Z20157

CIMR-L7Z20187

CIMR-L7Z20227

CIMR-L7Z20307

CIMR-L7Z20377

CIMR-L7Z20457

CIMR-L7Z20557

Model

3G3RV-PFI2035-SE

3G3RV-PFI2060-SE

3G3RV-PFI2100-SE

3G3RV-PFI2130-SE

3G3RV-PFI2160-SE

3G3RV-PFI2200-SE

Maximum Voltage

Ambient Temperature

: AC 240V 3phase

: 45°C (max.)

* max. motor cable length: 10 m Class B, 50 m Class A

Rated Voltage: AC240V 3 ph.

Ambient Temperature: 45°C (max.)

Line Filter

Current

(A)

Weight

(kg)

1.4

3.0

100

130

160

200

4.9

4.3

6.0

11.0

Dimensions

W x D x H

141 x 46 x 330

206 x 60 x 355

236 x 80 x 408

90 x 180 x 366

120 x 170 x 451

130 x 240 x 610

Installation inverters and EMC filters

L1 L2

Ground Bonds

( remove any paint )

Line

Filter

Load

Inverter

PE L1

L3 U

WPE

Cable Length as short as possible

Metal Plate

Ground Bonds

( remove any paint )

Motor cable screened

XIII

XIV

Registered Trademarks

The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.

•

DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,

Inc.).

•

InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.

Profibus is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.

Handling Inverters

This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.

Varispeed L7 Introduction ......................................................1-2

Confirmations upon Delivery..................................................1-3

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ........................................1-7

Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .......................1-8

Installation Orientation and Space .........................................1-9

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ......................1-10

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front

Cover ....................................................................................1-11

-2

Varispeed L7 Introduction

Varispeed L7 Models

The Varispeed L7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage class es: 200 V and 400 V. The maximum motor capacities vary from 3.7 to 55 kW (23 models).

Voltage

Class

Maximum

Motor

Capacity kW

200 V class

400 V class

3.7

5.5

7.5

18.5

4.0

5.5

7.5

* 200V/400V class 30KW-55KW model is developing.

Output

Capacity kVA

106

CIMR-L7Z23P7

CIMR-L7Z25P5

CIMR-L7Z27P5

CIMR-L7Z2011

CIMR-L7Z2015

CIMR-L7Z2018

CIMR-L7Z2022

CIMR-L7Z2030

CIMR-L7Z2037

CIMR-L7Z2045

CIMR-L7Z2055

CIMR-L7Z43P7

CIMR-L7Z44P0

CIMR-L7Z45P5

CIMR-L7Z47P5

CIMR-L7Z4011

CIMR-L7Z4015

CIMR-L7Z4018

CIMR-L7Z4022

CIMR-L7Z4030

CIMR-L7Z4037

CIMR-L7Z4045

CIMR-L7Z4055

Varispeed L7

Table 1.1 Varispeed L7 Models

Basic Model

Number

Specifications

(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)

Open Chassis

(IEC IP00)

CIMR-L7Z

Enclosed Wall-mounted

(NEMA 1)

CIMR-L7Z

Enclosed Wall-mounted

(IEC IP20)

CIMR-L7Z

Remove the top and bottom covers from the

Enclosed Wall-mounted model.

23P71

25P51

27P51

20111

20151

20181

23P77

25P57

27P57

20117

20157

20187

20220

20300

20370

20450

20550

Remove the top and bottom covers from the

Enclosed Wall-mount model.

40220

40300

40370

40450

40550

20221

20301

20371

20451

20551

43P71

44P01

45P51

47P51

40111

40151

40181

40221

40301

40371

40451

40551

20227

20307

20377

20457

20557

43P77

45P57

47P57

40117

40157

40187

40227

40307

40377

40457

40557

Confirmations upon Delivery

Checks

Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.

Item

Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered?

Table 1.2 Checks

Method

Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.

Is the Inverter damaged in any way?

Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.

Are any screws or other components loose?

Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.

If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your OYMC representative immediately.

Nameplate Information

There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.

Example Nameplate

The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic European Inverter: 3-phase, 400 VAC,

3.7 kW, IEC IP20 standards

Inverter model

Input specification

Output specification

Lot number

Serial number

UL file number

MODEL

INPUT

CIMR-L7Z43P7

SPEC: 43P77A

AC3PH 380-480V 50/60Hz 10.2A

OUTPUT

O/N

S/N

AC3PH 0-480V 0-120Hz 8.5A 3min. 50%ED 8.5kVA

MASS: 4.0 kg

PRG:

FILE NO E131457

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORARION

MADE IN JAPAN

Fig 1.1 Nameplate

Inverter specifications

Mass

-4

Inverter Model Numbers

The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.

CIMR – L7 Z 2 3P7

Inverter

Varispeed L7

No.

Specification

OYMC Europ. Std.

No.

Voltage Class

AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V

AC Input, 3-phase, 400 V

No.

3P7

5P5 to

Max. Motor Capacity

3.7 kW

5.5 kW to

55 kW

“P” Indicates the decimal point.

Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers

Inverter Specifications

The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity, the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.

No.

Voltage Class

AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V

AC Input, 3-phase 400 V

2 3P7 1

No.

3P7

5P5 to

Max. Motor Capacity

3.7 kW

5.5 kW to

55 kW

“P” Indicates the decimal point

No.

Protective Structure

Open chassis (IEC IP00)

Enclosed wall-mounted

(NEMA Type 1)

Enclosed wall-mounted

(IEC IP20)

Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications

Confirmations upon Delivery

Component Names

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in

Fig 1.4

. The Inverter with the ter-

minal cover removed is shown in

Fig 1.5

Front cover

Digital Operator

Terminal cover

Bottom protective cover

Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)

Mounting

Diecast cover

Nameplate

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminal

Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)

-6

Inverters of 22 kW or More

The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in

Fig 1.6

. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in

Fig 1.7

Inveter cover

Front cover

Mounting holes

Cooling fan

Nameplate

Digital Operator

Terminal cover

Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)

Ground terminals

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)

Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW

200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW

400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW

Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters

Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1xIEC IP20)

Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1 y

IEC IP20) are shown below.

200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW

Grommet

200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW

400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW

Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters

-8

Checking and Controlling the Installation Site

Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.

Installation Site

Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.

Table 1.3 Installation Site

Type

Enclosed wall-mounted

(NEMA1)

Ambient Operating Temperature

-10 to + 40

°C

Humidity

95% RH or less (no condensation)

Open chassis and IEC IP20 -10 to + 45

°C

95% RH or less (no condensation)

Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.

Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.

•

Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.

When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.

•

Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.

Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.

Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.

Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.

Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.

Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.

Controlling the Ambient Temperature

To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45

°C.

Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.

Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.

Installation Orientation and Space

Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.

Air

30 mm min.

50 mm min.

30 mm min.

Horizontal Space

200V class inverter, 3.7 to 55 kW

400V class inverter, 3.7 to 55 kW

120 mm min.

Vertical Space

Air

A B

50 mm 120 mm

Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space

IMPORTANT

1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.

2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of

18.5 kW or less in a panel.

Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or

400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover

Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.

Removing the Terminal Cover

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.

Fig 1.1 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)

Inverters of 22 kW or More

Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.

-10

Fig 1.2 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z4022 Shown Above)

Attaching the Terminal Cover

When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.

For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front Cover

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and front cover in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator/Monitor from the front cover before removing the front cover.

The removal and attachment procedures are described below.

Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor

Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator/Monitor in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital

Operator/Monitor and lift the Digital Operator/Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator/Monitor as shown in the following illustration.

Fig 1.11 Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)

Removing the Front Cover

Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.

-12

Fig 1.12 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)

Mounting the Front Cover

After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order.

1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator/Monitor attached to the front cover; otherwise,

Digital Operator/Monitor may malfunction due to imperfect contact.

2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.

Mounting the Digital Operator/Monitor

After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator/Monitor onto the Inverter using the following procedure.

1. Hook the Digital Operator/Monitor at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.

2. Press the Digital Operator/Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).

Fig 1.13 Mounting the Digital Operator/Monitor

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front Cover

IMPORTANT

1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator/Monitor or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.

2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator/Monitor attached to the front cover.

Imperfect contact can result.

Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator/Monitor to the front cover.

Inverters of 22 kW or More

For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and main cover.

Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.

Removing the Front Cover

Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.

Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z4022 Shown Above)

Attaching the Front Cover

After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.

1. Confirm that the Digital Operator/Monitor is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator/Monitor is mounted to it.

2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter.

Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.

-14

Wiring

This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.

Connection Diagram ....................................................2-2

Terminal Block Configuration.......................................2-4

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals......................................2-5

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................2-17

Wiring Check .............................................................2-23

Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-24

-2

Connection Diagram

The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in

Fig 2.4

When using the Digital Operator/Monitor, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.

3-phase power

380 to 480V

50/60Hz

Magnetic

Contactor

DC reactor to improve input power factor (optional)

Braking Resistor unit (optional)

Short-circuit Bar

Line

Filter

(+1)

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

(+2) ( ) B1 B2

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Motor

IM/PM

Multi-function

Inputs

(Factory setting)

Forward run/stop

Reverse run/stop

Nominal speed

Inspection Run

Internediate speed

Leveling speed

Not used

Hardware baseblock

+24 V 8 mA

IP24V (24V)

CN5 (NPN setting)

E (G)

TA1

PG-X2

(Optional)

TA3

TA2

A Pulse

B Pulse

Z Pulse

Pulse Monitor Output

RS-422 Level

(100m or less wiring)

External frequency reference

Frequency setting adjustment

Frequency setter

Ω

0 to 10 V

Communication and

Control Cards

(For Option)

Frequency setting power +15V 20mA

Master speed reference 0 to 10V

2CN

Fault contact Output

250VAC 1A or less

30VDC 1A or less

Brake Command

(Factory setting)

Contactor Control

(Factory setting)

Multi-fanction

Contact Output

250VAC 1A or less

30VDC 1A or less

Inverter Ready

(Factory setting)

Input Voltage

48/96VDC

For Battery

DC/DC

Converter

For option

Note:

1.Main circuit terminals are indicatied with double circles and

control circuit terminals are indicatied with a single circles

2.The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20mA

3.Sequence input signal S1 to S7 and BB are labelled for sequence

connections for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors as the

default setting.

Output Voltage

For Contorl power supply

Shielded wires

Twisted-pair wires

Fig 2.4 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)

Connection Diagram

Circuit Descriptions

Refer to the numbers indicated in

Fig 2.4

These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation

These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV (or equivalent) or non-

SELV circuits, but not both.

Inverters supplied by a four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)

These circuits are SELV circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV (or equivalent) circuits.

Inverters supplied by a three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)

These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits other circuits by protective separation, but only with basic insulation. These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible, unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation

IMPORTANT

1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.

E(G)

SC SC SC BB +V A1 AC

S1 S2 S3

S5 S6 S7

M5 M6 MA MB MC

M3 M4 M1 M2

E(G)

2. The output current capability of the +V terminal is 20 mA.

3. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.

4. The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 and BB is shown for the connection of contacts or NPN transistors (0V common and sinking mode). This is the default setting.

For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply, refer to

Table 2.11

5. A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Remove the short circuit bar when connecting a DC reactor.

Terminal Block Configuration

The terminal arrangements are shown in

Fig 2.5

and

Fig 2.6

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminal

Fig 2.5 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 3.7 kW)

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminals

Fig 2.6 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more)

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from

Table 2.1

Table 2.3

. Refer to instruction manual

TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.

Inverter

Model

CIMR-

L7Z23P7

Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes

Terminal Symbol

Terminal

Screws

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M4 1.2 to 1.5

(12 to 10)

(12)

L7Z25P5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M4 1.2 to 1.5

(10)

L7Z27P5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO

M5 2.5

(8 to 6)

(8)

L7Z2011

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M5 2.5

L7Z2015

L7Z2018

W/T3, NO

B1, B2, PO

W/T3, NO

B1, B2, PO

L7Z2022

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO

3, PO

V/T2,

L7Z2030

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,

V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO

3, PO

L7Z2037

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,

V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO

3, PO r/l1,

∆/l2

M10

4.0 to 5.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

(6 to 4)

(4 to 2)

(8 to 6)

(4)

25 to 35

(3 to 2)

10 to 16

(8 to 6)

(4)

25 to 35

(3 to 1)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

(1 to 1/0)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

70 to 95

(2/0 to 4/0)

6 to 16

(10 to 4)

35 to 70

(2 to 2/0)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

(6)

(4)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(4)

(2/0)

–

(2)

1.5

(16)

(4)

(3)

Wire Type

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

-6

Inverter

Model

CIMR-

L7Z2045

L7Z2055

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,

V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO

3, PO r/l1,

∆/l2

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, NO

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3, PO

Terminal Symbol

Terminal

Screws

M10

M12

M10

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

(3/0 to 4/0)

6 to 16

(10 to 4)

50 to 70

(1 to 2/0)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

50 to 95

(1/0 to 4/0)

(4/0)

6 to 70

(10 to 2/0)

35 to 95

(3 to 4/0)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size

2 mm

(AWG)

(3/0)

Wire Type

–

(1)

1.5

(16)

× 2P

(1/0

× 2P)

(4/0)

–

(1/0)

1.5

(16)

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables r/l1,

∆/l2

* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75

°C

Inverter

Model

CIMR-

L7Z43P7

L7Z44P0

L7Z45P5

L7Z47P5

L7Z4011

L7Z4015

L7Z4018

L7Z4022

Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes

Terminal Symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO

2, B1, B2,

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, NO

B1, B2, PO

(M6)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO, PO

Terminal

Screws

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

1.2 to 1.5

2.5

(4.0 to 5.0)

4.0 to 5.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

(8 to 6)

6 to 10

(10 to 6)

10 to 35

(8 to 2)

(8)

10 to 25

(8 to 4)

(6 to 4)

16 to 35

(6 to 2)

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

2.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

2.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

(12 to 10)

2.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

(10)

(12 to 10)

6 to 10

(10 to 6)

2.5

(14)

(12)

2.5

(14)

(10)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

(12)

2.5

(14)

(12)

(8)

(10)

(8)

(10)

(8)

(6)

Wire Type

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Inverter

Model

CIMR-

L7Z4030

L7Z4037

L7Z4045

L7Z4055

Terminal Symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/

T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO

3, PO

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/

T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO

3, PO

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO

3, PO

Terminal

Screws

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO, PO

V/T2,

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

(4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

25 to 50

(4 to 1/0)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

35 to 50

(2 to 1/0)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

(1 to 1/0)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

(4)

(2)

(4)

(2)

(4)

(1)

(4)

Wire Type

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75

°C.

Table 2.3 Lug Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)

Wire Thickness (mm

)

Terminal Screws

M3.5

0.5

Size

1.25 / 3.5

M4 1.25 / 4

0.75

1.25

M3.5

1.25 / 3.5

1.25 / 4

1.25 / 3.5

1.25 / 4

3.5/5.5

M3.5

2 / 3.5

2 / 4

2 / 5

2 / 6

2 / 8

5.5 / 4

5.5 / 5

5.5 / 6

5.5 / 8

8 / 5

8 / 6

8 / 8

14 / 6

14 / 8

22 / 6

22 / 8

-8

Wire Thickness (mm

30/38

50/60

100

150

200

325

)

Terminal Screws

M10

M12

M12 x 2

M16

Size

38 / 8

60 / 8

60 / 10

80 / 10

100 / 10

100 / 12

150 / 12

200 / 12

325 / 12

325 / 16

IMPORTANT

Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:

Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (

Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10

-3

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in

Table 2.4

. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.

Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)

Purpose Terminal Symbol

Model: CIMR-L7Z

200 V Class 400 V Class

23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055

Main circuit power input

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2022 to 2055 4022 to 4055

Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055

23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055 DC bus terminals

Braking Resistor Unit connection

B1, B2

DC reactor connection

1, 2

Braking Unit connection

23P7 to 2018

2022 to 2055

43P7 to 4018

4022 to 4055

Ground

Battery power input

PO, NO

23P7 to 2055

43P7 to 4055

-10

Main Circuit Configurations

The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in

Table 2.5

+ 1

+ 2

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations

200 V Class

CIMR - L7Z23P7 to 2018

400 V Class

CIMR - L7Z43P7 to 4018

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

N0 P0

CIMR - L7Z2022,2030

+ 3

CIMR - L7Z4022 to 4055

+ 3

+ 1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

+ 1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

CIMR - L7Z2037 to 2055

+ 3

+ 1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

r/l1

∆ 200/ l200

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Note: Consult your OYMC representative before using 12-phase rectification.

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Standard Connection Diagrams

Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in

Fig 2.7

. These are the same for both 200 V Class and

400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.

CIMR-L7Z3P7 to 2018 and 43P7 to 4018

DC reactor

(optional)

Braking Resistor

Unit (optional)

CIMR-L7Z2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055

Unit (optional)

Braking Unit

(optional)

3-phase 200

VAC (400 VAC)

3-phase 200 VAC

(400 VAC)

The DC reactor is built in.

Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor.

CIMR-L7Z2037 to 2055

Braking Resistor

Unit (optional)

Braking Unit

(optional)

3-phase

200 VAC

Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models.

Fig 2.7 Main Circuit Terminal Connections

-12

Wiring the Main Circuits

This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.

Wiring Main Circuit Inputs

Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.

Installing Fuses

To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.

Inverter Type

23P7

25P5

27P5

2011

2015

2018

2022

2030

2037

2045

2055

Table 2.6 Input Fuses

Voltage (V)

240

Fuse

Current (A)

100

130

150

180

240

300

350

2 t (A

2 s)

82~220

220~610

290~1300

450~5000

1200~7200

1800~7200

870~16200

1500~23000

2100~19000

2700~55000

4000~55000

43P7

44P0

45P5

47P5

4011

4015

4018

4022

4030

4037

4045

4055

480

100

125

150

34~72

50~570

100~570

100~640

150~1300

400~1800

700~4100

240~5800

500~5800

750~5800

920~13000

1500~13000

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Installing a Moulded-case Circuit Breaker

When connecting the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) to the power supply using a moulded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.

•

Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times of the inverter's rated current.

For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the inverter's overload protection (one minute at

150% of the rated output current).

Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. If an earth leakage breaker should be used, select one that detects only the leakage current which is in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans but not high-frequency leakage currents.

•

For a special-purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.

When using a general earth leakage breaker, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.

Installing a Magnetic Contactor at the Input

If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off by a control circuit, a magnetic contactor can be used.

The following things should be considered:

•

The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.

Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.

Do not exceed one power up per hour.

When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator/Monitor, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.

Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the output phase sequence.

Installing an Input AC Reactor

If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or a phase advancing capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the inverter unit to break down.

To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.

This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.

Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.

-14

Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit

Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.

Connecting the Inverter and Motor

Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respective to the motor lead wires U, V, and W.

Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.

Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.

Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter case, an electric shock or grounding may occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.

Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor

Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the

Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn.

Using a Magnetic Contactor

Check the control sequence to make sure, that the magnetic contactor (MC) between the Inverter and motor is not turned ON or OFF during inverter operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the inverter’s overcurrent protection may operate.

Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

The cable between the Inverter and motor is 30 m max.

Ground Wiring

Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.

•

Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100

Ω and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10

Ω.

•

Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.

Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.

Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.

When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.

OK NO

Fig 2.8 Ground Wiring

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Connecting a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit (CDBR)

Connect a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit to the Inverter like shown in the

Fig 2.9

The example shows a braking resistor with integrated thermal overload switch. To prevent the braking unit/ braking resistor from overheating, design the control circuit to turn OFF the power supply using the thermal

overload relay contacts of the units as shown in

Fig 2.9

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 3.7 to 18.5 kW Output Capacity

Braking Resistor

Inverter

Thermal overload relay contact

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output Capacity

CDBR Braking Unit Braking Resistor

Inverter

Thermal overload relay contact

Fig 2.9 Connecting the Braking Resistor and Braking Unit

-16

Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and jumper settings like shown in

Fig 2.10

. There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave. Select “Master”

for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e. from the second Unit onwards).

Thermal overload relay contact

Braking

Resistor

Thermal overload relay contact

Braking

Resistor

Braking

Resistor

Inverter

Braking Unit #2

Braking Unit #3

Braking Unit #1

Thermal overload relay contact

Fig 2.10 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

Connecting the battery power supply

Varispeed L7 is equipped with the cable for the battery power supply connection by the standard.

Please detach the twisted-pair cable connected with main circuit terminal B1/+3 and -.

Please connect the twisted-pair cable by using the relay terminal for UPS/Battery.

Connecting the battery power supply as shown in

Fig 2.11

Table 2.7

L2-11 (Battery Voltage)

H1-05 (Terminal S7 function selection)

To use the battery voltage is input

Setting “85” Battery operation command

UPS/Battery terminal

Inverter

Fig 2.11 Connecting the battery power supply

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Wire Sizes

For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 30 m or less, and separate the lines from main power lines or other control circuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices.

When setting frequencies from an external frequency source (and not from a Digital Operator/Monitor), used shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground.

The terminal numbers and the appropriate wire sizes are shown in

Table 2.8

Terminals

AC, SC, A1, +V, S1, S2,

S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, BB,

MA, MB, MC, M1, M2,

M3, M4, M5, M6

Table 2.8 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)

Terminal

Screws

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

Wire Type

Phoenix type

0.5 to 0.6

Single wire

*3:

0.5 to 2.5

Stranded wire:

0.5 to 1.5

(26 to 14)

0.75

(18)

• Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1

• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable

E (G) M3.5

0.8 to 1.0

0.5 to 2.5

(20 to 14)

1.0

(12)

* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.

* 2. Refer to

Table 2.3

for suitable lug sizes for the wires.

* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.

Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines

Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

0.25 (24)

0.5 (20)

0.75 (18)

1.5 (16)

2 (14)

Table 2.9 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

Model

AI 0.25 - 8YE

AI 0.5 - 8WH

AI 0.75 - 8GY

AI 1.5 - 8BK

AI 2.5 - 8BU d1

0.8

1.1

1.3

1.8

2.3

2.5

2.8

3.4

4.2

12.5

Manufacturer

Phoenix Contact

Fig 2.12 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

-18

Wiring Method

Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.

1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.

2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.

3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.

Screwdriver

Control circuit terminal block

Blade of screwdriver

Strip the end for

7 mm if no solderless terminal is used.

Wires

Solderless terminal or wire without soldering

3.5 mm max.

Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.

Fig 2.13 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Control Circuit Terminal Functions

The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in

Table 2.10

. Use the appropriate terminals for the correct purposes.

Type

Digital input signals

Analog input signals

Table 2.10 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings

No.

Signal Name Function

S1 Forward run/stop command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.

S2 Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.

S3 Nominal speed

Inspection run

Intermediate speed

Nominal speed when ON.

Inspection RUN when

ON.

Intermediate speed when

ON.

Leveling speed when ON.

Functions are selected by setting H1-01 to

H1-05.

S6 Leveling speed

S7 Not used

BB Hardware baseblock

SC Digital input common

–

+V 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references

Signal Level

24 VDC, 8 mA

Photo-coupler

–

15 V

(Max. current: 20 mA)

0 to +10 V(20 k

Ω)

–

A1 Frequency reference

AC Analog reference neutral

E(G)

Shield wire, optional ground line connection point

0 to +10 V/100%

Brake command

(1NO contact)

–

Brake command when

ON.

–

Digital output signals

Contactor Control

(1NO contact)

Inverter Ready

(1NO contact)

Fault output signal (SPDT)

(1 Change over contact)

Contactor Control when

Inverter Ready when ON.

Multi-function contact outputs

Relay contacts

Contact capacity:

1 A max. at 250 VAC

1 A max. at 30 VDC

Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC

Fault when OPEN across MB and MC

* 1. Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment.

* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil with DC power supply, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in

Fig 2.14

Flywheel diode

External power:

30 VDC max.

Coil

1 A max.

The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.

Fig 2.14 Flywheel Diode Connection

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Sinking/Sourcing Mode (NPN/PNP Selection)

The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common, NPN) and sourcing mode

(+24V common, PNP) by using the jumper CN5. An external power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods.

Table 2.11 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals

Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode (NPN) External Power Supply – Sinking Mode (NPN)

B2 B3

A2 A3

CN5

IP24V

(+24V)

24 VDC

B1 B2 B3

A2 A3

CN5

IP24V

(+24V)

Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode (PNP)

B2 B3

A2 A3

CN5

IP24V

(+24V)

External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode (PNP)

24 VDC

B1 B2 B3

A2 A3

CN5

IP24V

(+24V)

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Control Circuit Terminal Connections

Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in

Fig 2.15

Multi-function

Inputs

(Factory setting)

Forward run/stop

Reverse run/stop

Nominal speed

Inspection Run

Internediate speed

Leveling speed

Not used

Hardware baseblock

+24 V 8 mA

IP24V (24V)

CN5 (NPN setting)

E (G)

External frequency reference

Frequency setting adjustment

Frequency setter

Ω

0 to 10 V

Communication and

Control Cards

(For Option)

Frequency setting power +15V 20mA

2CN

Master speed reference 0 to 10V

Input Voltage

48/96VDC

For Battery

DC/DC

Converter

For option

Note:

1.Main circuit terminals are indicatied with double circles and

control circuit terminals are indicatied with a single circles

2.The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20mA

3.Sequence input signal S1 to S7 and BB are labelled for sequence

connections for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors as the

default setting.

Output Voltage

For Contorl power supply

Shielded wires

Twisted-pair wires

Fault contact Output

250VAC 1A or less

30VDC 1A or less

Brake Command

(Factory setting)

Contactor Control

(Factory setting)

Multi-fanction

Contact Output

250VAC 1A or less

30VDC 1A or less

Inverter Ready

(Factory setting)

Fig 2.15 Control Circuit Terminal Connections

-22

Control Circuit Wiring Precautions

Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.

•

Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3, PO, NO) and other high-power lines.

Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, and M6 (contact outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.

•

If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.

Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults.

Ground the cable shields with the maximum contact area of the shield and ground.

Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends.

Wiring Check

Checks

Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform continuity check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.

•

Is all wiring correct?

Have no wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?

•

Are all screws tight?

Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Option Card Models and Specifications

Up to three Option Cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one card into each of the three

places on the controller card (A, C and D) shown in

Fig 2.16

Table 2.12

lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.

Table 2.12 Option Card Specifications

Card Model Specifications

Mounting

Location

PG Speed Control Cards

PG-B2

PG-X2

Two phase (phase A and B), +12V inputs, max. response frequency: 50 kHz

Three phase (phase A, B, Z), line driver inputs

(RS422), max. response frequency: 300 kHz

DeviceNet communications card

Profibus-DP communications card

InterBus-S communications card

CANOpen communications card

SI-N1

SI-P1

SI-R1

SI-S1

Option card for DeviceNet fieldbus

Option card for Profibus-DP fieldbus

Option card for InterBus-S fieldbus

Option card for CANOpen fieldbus

Analog Output Cards

Digital Output Cards

AO-08

2 channel analog output card

Signal level: 0 to 10 V

Resolution: 8 Bit

AO-12

2 channel high resolution analog output card

Signal level: -10 to +10 V

Resolution: 11 Bit + sign

DO-08

6 channel digital output card for monitoring the inverter status (fault, zero speed, running, etc.)

DO-02C 2 channel relay contact output

Installation

Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the

Inverter does not glow anymore. After that remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and front cover and then mount the Option Card.

Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for the mounting instructions for option slots A and C.

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Preventing C and D Option Card Connectors from Rising

After installing an Option Card into slot C or D, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out.

A Option Card mounting spacer hole

CN4

A Option Card connector

CN2

C Option Card connector

A Option Card mounting spacer

(Provided with A Option Card)

Option Clip

(To prevent raising of

C and D Option Card)

C Option Card mounting spacer

C Option Card

D Option Card

D Option Card mounting spacer

A Option Card mounting spacer

A Option Card

Fig 2.16 Mounting Option Cards

-26

PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications

PG-B2

The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.

Terminal

TA1

TA2

TA3

(E)

No.

Table 2.13 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications

Contents

Power supply for pulse generator

Pulse input terminals phase A

Pulse input terminals phase B

Specifications

12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.

0 VDC (GND for power supply)

H: +8 to 12 V (max. input frequency: 50 kHz)

GND pulse input phase A

H: +8 to 12 V (max. input frequency: 50 kHz)

GND pulse input phase B

Pulse monitor output terminals phase A

Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.

Pulse monitor output terminals phase B

Shield connection terminal

Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.

PG-X2

The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.

Terminal

TA1

TA2

TA3

No.

(E)

Table 2.14 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications

Contents Specifications

12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*

Power supply for pulse generator

0 VDC (GND for power supply)

5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*

Pulse input terminal phase A (+)

Pulse input terminal phase A (–)

Pulse input terminal phase B (+)

Pulse input terminal phase B (–)

Pulse input terminal phase Z (+)

Pulse input terminal phase Z (–)

Common terminal inputs

Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (+)

Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (–)

Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (+)

Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (–)

Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (+)

Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (–)

Common terminal monitor outputs

Shield connection terminal

Line driver input (RS422 level)

(maximum input frequency: 300 kHz)

–

Line driver output (RS422 level output)

–

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Wiring

Wiring the PG-B2

The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG-B2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG.

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

Three-phase 200

VAC (400 VAC)

Inverter

Power supply +12 V

Power supply 0 V

Pulse input phase A

GND pulse input phase A

Pulse input phase B

GND pulse input phase B

Pulse monitor output phase A

Pulse monitor output phase B

Fig 2.17 PG-B2 Wiring Using the Option Cards Power Supply

Fig 2.18 PG-B2 Wiring Using a 12 V External Power Supply

•

Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.

•

Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).

Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.

•

The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.

•

The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05. The factory preset if for forward rotation, A-phase advancement.

A-phase pulses

B-phase pulses

-28

PG power supply +12 V

Pulse monitor output phase A

Pulse input phase A

A-phase pulses

Pulse monitor output phase B

Pulse input phase B

B-phase pulses

•

When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).

•

The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using parameter F1-06.

Fig 2.19 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2

Wiring the PG-X2

The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG-X2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG.

Three-phase 200

VAC (400 VAC)

Inverter

PG-X2

+12 V

0 V

+5 V

A-phase pulse input (+)

Pulse input phase A (–)

Pulse input phase B (+)

Pulse input phase B (–)

Pulse monitor output phase A

Pulse monitor output phase B

Pulse monitor output phase Z

Fig 2.20 PG-X2 Wiring Using the Option Cards Power Supply

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Fig 2.21 PG-X2 Wiring Using a 5 V External Power Supply

•

Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.

•

Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).

Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.

•

The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.

•

The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.

Wiring Terminal Blocks

Use not more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines and keep them separate from power lines.

Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal.

Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)

Terminal wire sizes are shown in

Table 2.15

Table 2.15 Wire Sizes

Terminal

Screws

Wire Thickness (mm

)

Pulse generator power supply

Pulse input terminal

Pulse monitor output terminal

Shield connection terminal

M3.5

0.5 to 1.0

0.5 to 2.5

Wire Type

• Shielded, twisted-pair wire

• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable

Straight Solderless Terminals

We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.

Refer to

Table 2.9

for specifications.

-30

Cable Lug Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque

The lug sizes and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in

Table 2.16

Table 2.16 Cable Lugs and Tightening Torques

Wire Thickness [mm

]

Terminal

Screws

Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N

• m)

0.5

0.75

1.25

M3.5

1.25 - 3.5

2 - 3.5

0.8

Precautions

The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to

page 2-17

. Observe

the following precautions when wiring.

•

Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main power lines and other control circuits.

•

The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused by noise.

Connect the shield (green grounding cable of the option card) to the shield terminal (E).

•

Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.

A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply consumption is higher than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)

Make sure not to exceed the PG cards maximum input frequency. The output frequency of the pulse generator can be calculated using the following formula.

PG (Hz) =

Motor speed at maximum output frequency (min

–1

)

60 x PG rating (p/rev)

Digital Monitor/

Operator and Modes

The Varispeed L7 is equipped with the Digital Monitor JVOP-163 which shows the drive status.

The optional Digital Operator JVOP-160 can be used to adjust parameters as required.

A This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes.

LED Monitor JVOP-163 ................................................3-2

Digital Operator JVOP-160 ...........................................3-3

LED Monitor JVOP-163

LED Monitor

Indicators the operation status by the combination of the LED display (Lights up, Blink, and Off) at RUN,

DS1, and DS2.

The LED pattern is as follows at each mode.

Operation Mode Indicators

RUN: Lights up during inverter run, Off if the inverter is stopped

DS1: Drive Status 1

DS2: Drive Status 2

The combination of the three LEDs Run, DS1 and DS2 indicates the drive status.

Drive Status Indications

Alarm Indications

Fault Indications

-2

LED Display Examples

Normal operation: The figure below shows the LED display when the drive is ready and no FWD/REV signal is active

RUN DS1 DS2 POWER

Alarm:

Fault:

The figure below shows an example of the LED display when a minor fault occurs.

Refer to Chapter 6 and take appropriate countermeasures.

RUN DS1 DS2 POWER

The figure below shows an example of the LED display when an OV or UV fault has occurred

RUN DS1 DS2 POWER

Digital Operator JVOP-160

Digital Operator Display

The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.

Drive Status Indicators

FWD: Lights up when a forward run command is input.

REV: Lights up when a reverse run command is input.

SEQ: Lights up when any other run command source than the digital operator is selected

REF: Lights up when any other frequency reference source than the digital operator is selected

ALARM: Lights up when an error or alarm has occurred.

Data Display

Displays monitor data, parameter numbers, and settings.

Mode Display (displayed at the upper left of data display)

DRIVE: Lights up in Drive Mode.

QUICK: Lights up in Quick Programming Mode.

ADV: Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode.

VERIFY: Lights up in Verify Mode.

A. TUNE:Lights up in Autotuning Mode.

Keys

Execute operations such as setting parameters, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.

Fig 3.22 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions

Digital Operator Keys

The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in

Table 3.17

Key Name

LOCAL/REMOTE Key

Table 3.17 Key Functions

Function

Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).

This key can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter o2-01.

MENU Key Selects modes.

ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER key was pressed.

-4

Key

JOG Key

Name

Table 3.17 Key Functions (Continued)

Function

Enables jog operation when the Inverter is operated from the Digital

Operator.

FWD/REV Key

Shift/RESET Key

Increment Key

Decrement Key

DATA/ENTER Key

Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is operated from the Digital Operator.

Sets the active digit when programming parameters.

Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.

Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and increments set values.

Used to move to the next item or data.

Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and decrements set values.

Used to move to the previous item or data.

Pressed to enter menu items, parameters, and set values.

Also used to switch from one screen to another.

RUN Key

Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital Operator.

STOP Key

Stops Inverter operation.

This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting parameter o2-02.

Note: Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to the key names listed in the above table.

There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status.

The RUN key indicator will flash and the STOP key indicator will light during initial excitation or DC braking. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in

Fig 3.23

Inverter output frequency

Frequency setting

: Light up : Blinking : Not light up

Fig 3.23 RUN and STOP Indicators

Digital Operator JVOP-160

Inverter Modes

The Inverter's parameters and monitoring functions are organized in five groups that make it easier to read and adjust parameters.

The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the

Table 3.18

Drive mode

Mode

Table 3.18 Modes

Primary function(s)

Use this mode to start/stop the inverter, to monitor values such as the frequency references or output current and for displaying fault information or the fault history.

Quick programming mode

Advanced programming mode

Use this mode to read and set the basic parameters.

Use this mode to reference and set all parameters.

Verify mode

Autotuning mode*

Use this mode to read/set parameters that have been changed from their factory-set values.

Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor data in the vector control modes. The motor data are measured/calculated and set automatically.

This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.

* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating in the vector control modes.

-6

Switching Modes

The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed. Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch through the modes in sequence.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter a mode and to switch from a monitor display to the setting display.

Display During Run

Rdy

U1 01 =50.00Hz

U1-02=50.00Hz

U1-03=10.05A

Mode Selection

Display

Monitor Display

Setting Display

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

ESC

Rdy

U1 - 01=50.00Hz

U1-02=50.00Hz

U1-03=10.05A

RESET

Rdy

U101 =50.00Hz

U1-02=50.00Hz

U1-03=10.05A

ESC

-QUICK-

Control Method

A1-02 = 0

V/f Control

"0"

*0*

ESC

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 - 00=0

Select Language

RESET

-ADV-

Select Language

A100 = 0

English

"0"

*0*

ESC ESC

-ADV-

Select Language

A1-00 = 0

English

"0"

*0*

-VERIFY-

None Modified

The constant number will be displayed if a constant has been changed. Press the

DATA/ENTER key to enable the change.

ESC

-A.TUNE-

Tuning Mode Sel

T101 = 0

*0*

Standard Tuning

"0"

ESC

-QUICK-

Control Method

A1-02 = 0

V/f Control

"0"

*0*

-A.TUNE-

Tuning Mode Sel

T1- 01= 0

*0*

Standard Tuning

"0"

Fig 3.24 Mode Transitions

To run the inverter after viewing/changing parameters press the MENU key and the DATA/ENTER key in sequence to enter the Drive mode. A Run command is not accepted as long as the drive is in any other mode.

To enable Run commands from the terminals during programming set parameter b1-08 to “1”.

Digital Operator JVOP-160

Drive Mode

The Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. All monitor parameters (U1-) as well as fault information and the fault history can be displayed in this mode

When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the selected frequency reference value (d1-) can be changed in the frequency setting display using the Increment, Decrement, Shift/RESET and Enter keys. The parameter will be written and the display returns to the Monitor display.

Example Operations

Example key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.

Display During Running

Rdy

U1 01 =50.00Hz

U1-02=50.00Hz

U1-03=10.05A

Mode Selection

Display

Monitor Display

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

A B

Rdy

U1 - 01=50.00Hz

RESET

ESC

1 2

Rdy

U101 =50.00Hz

U1-02=50.00Hz

U1-03=10.05A

ESC

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

Rdy

U1 - 02=50.00Hz

U1-03=10.05A

U1-04= 2

RESET

ESC

Rdy

U102 =50.00Hz

U1-03=10.05A

U1-04= 2

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

Rdy

U1 - 55 = 11

U1-01=50.00Hz

U1-02=50.00Hz

Rdy

U2 - 01=OC

U2-02= OV

U2-03=50.00Hz

RESET

ESC

RESET

ESC

-DRIVE-

No of Travels

U155 = 11

Rdy

U1-01=50.00Hz

U1-02=50.00Hz

Rdy

U2 01 = OC

U2-02=OV

U2-03=50.00Hz

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

-DRIVE-

Fault Trace

U2 - 02 = OV

Rdy

U3-03=50.00Hz

U3-04=50.00Hz

RESET

U3 - 01= OC

U3-02= OV

U3-03= OH

Rdy

ESC

RESET

ESC

Rdy

U2 02 = OV

U3-03=50.00Hz

U3-04=50.00Hz

3 4

5 6

Rdy

U3 01 = OC

U3-02=OV

U3-03=OH

Rdy

U1 - 01= 0 50.00Hz

(0.00 ~ 50.00)

" 00.00Hz "

ESC

The Frequency Setting

Display will not be displayed when using an analog reference.

The fault name will be displayed if the DATA/ENTER

Key is pressed while a constant is being displayed for which a fault code is being displayed.

ESC

Frequency Setting Display

U2 - 01= OC

Over Current

U2 - 02= OV

Rdy

DC Bus Overvolt

U3 - 01= OC

Rdy

Over Current

U3 - 02= OV

Rdy

DC Bus Overvolt

Rdy

U3 - 02 = OV

U3-03= OH

U3-04= UV

RESET

ESC

Rdy

U3 02 = OV

U3-03= OH

U3-04= UV

5 6

A B

Fig 3.25 Operations in Drive Mode

ESC

-8

Note: 1. When changing the display with the Increment / Decrement keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the first parameter number and vice versa. For example, the next display after the one for U1-01 will be U1-55. This is indicated in the figures by the letters A and B and the numbers 1 to 6.

2. The display for the first monitor parameter (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON. The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.

Quick Programming Mode

In quick programming mode, the basic parameters required for the elevator operation like speeds, acceleration/deceleration times etc. can be monitored and set.

The parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the frequency. The parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.

Refer to

Chapter 4, User Parameters

for details on the parameters displayed in quick programming mode.

Example Operations

Example key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

A B

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

ESC

-QUICK-

Control Method

A1-02 = 0

*0*

V/f Control

"0"

ESC

-QUICK-

Control Method

A1-02 = 0

*0*

V/f Control

"0"

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-QUICK-

Accel Time 1

C1-01 = 1.50sec

(0.00 ~ 600.00)

"1.50"

ESC

-QUICK-

Accel Time 1

C1-01 = 0 01.50sec

(0.00 ~ 600.00)

"1.50"

-QUICK-

Decel Time 1

C1-01 = 1.50sec

(0.00 ~ 600.00)

"1.50" -VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

ESC

C1-01 = 0 01.50sec

(0.00 ~ 600.00)

"1.50"

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

-QUICK-

Mtr Rated Power

E2-11 = 4.00kW

(0.00 ~ 650.00)

"4.00kW"

ESC

-QUICK-

Mtr Rated Power

E2-11 = 0 04.00kW

(0.00 ~ 650.00)

"4.00kW"

-QUICK-

MOL Fault Select

L1-01=1

"1"

*1*

Std Fan Cooled

-QUICK-

MOL Fault Select

L1-01 = 1

"1"

*1*

Std Fan Cooled

ESC

A B

Fig 3.26 Operations in Quick Programming Mode

Digital Operator JVOP-160

Advanced Programming Mode

In advanced programming mode all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set.

A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter will be saved and the display will return to monitor display when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.

Refer to

Chapter 4, User Parameters

for details on the parameters.

Example Operations

Example key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

A B

1 2

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

ESC

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 -00=0

Select Language

RESET

ESC

-ADV-

Select Language

A1 00 = 0

English

"0"

*0*

ESC

-ADV-

Select Language

A1-02 =

English

"0"

0 *0*

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 - 02 =0

Control Method

RESET

ESC

-ADV-

Control Method

A1 02 = 0

V/f Control

"0"

*0*

ESC

-ADV-

Control Method

A1-02 = 0

V/f Control

"0"

*0*

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

-ADV-

Accel/Decel

C1 01 = 1.50sec

Accel Time 1

RESET

ESC

-ADV-

Accel/Decel

C1 02 = 1.50sec

Accel Time 1

RESET

ESC

A B

-ADV-

Accel Time 1

C1 01 = 1.5sec

(0.00 ~ 600.00)

"1.50sec"

-ADV-

Accel Time 2

C1 02 = 1.5sec

(0.00 ~ 600.00)

"1.50sec"

3 4

ESC

-ADV-

Accel Time 1

C101 = 0 01.5sec

(0.00 ~ 600.00)

"1.50sec"

-ADV-

Accel Time 2

C102 = 0 01.5sec

(0.00 ~ 600.00)

"1.50sec"

Fig 3.27 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode

-10

Setting Parameters

Here the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 1.5 s to 2.5 s is shown.

Step

No.

Table 3.19 Setting Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode

Digital Operator Display

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

U1 01 =50.00Hz

U1-02=50.00Hz

U1-03=10.05A

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

Power supply turned ON.

Description

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

Press the MENU key 3 times to enter the advanced programming mode.

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 -00=1

Select Language

-ADV-

Accel / Decel

C1 -00 = 1.50sec

Accel Time 1

-ADV-

Accel Time 1

C1-01 = 0 01.50sec

(0.00 ~ 600.0)

"1.50sec"

-ADV-

Accel Time 1

C1-01 = 0

0 1.50sec

(0.00 ~ 600.0)

"1.50sec"

-ADV-

Accel Time 1

C1-01 = 0 0 1 .50sec

(0.00 ~ 600.0)

"1.50sec"

-ADV-

Accel Time 1

C1-01 = 0 0

2 .50sec

(0.00 ~ 600.0)

"1.50sec"

-ADV-

Entry Accepted

Press the DATA/ENTER to access the monitor display.

Press the Increment or Decrement key to display the parameter

C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).

Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the setting display. The current setting value of C1-01 is displayed.

Press the Shift/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.

Press the Increment key to change set value to 2.50 s.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to save the set data.

“Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1 sec after pressing the

DATA/ENTER key.

-ADV-

Accel Time 1

C101 = 2.50sec

(0.00 ~ 600.0)

"1.50sec"

The display returns to the monitor display for C1-01.

Digital Operator JVOP-160

Verify Mode

The Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.

The parameter A1-02 is the only parameter from the A1- group, which will be displayed in the modified constant list if it has been changed before. The other parameters will not be displayed, even if they are different from the default setting.

In the verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming mode. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change a setting. When the DATA/ENTER key is pressed the parameter setting are written and the display returns to the Monitor display.

Example Operations

In the example below the following settings have been changed from their default settings:

•

C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1)

•

C1-02 (Acceleration Time 2)

E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting)

E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

ESC

A B

C1-01 = 002.0sec

(0.00 ~ 600.0)

"1.50sec"

C1-02 = 002.0sec

(0.00 ~ 600.0)

"1.50sec"

-VERIFY-

Input Voltage

E1-01=390VAC

(310~510)

"380VAC"

E2-01= 7.20A

(0.80 ~ 16.00)

"7.00A"

A B

ESC

C1-01 = 0 02.0sec

(0.00 ~ 600.00)

"1.50sec"

C1-02 = 0 02.0sec

(0.00 ~ 600.0)

"1.50sec"

-VERIFY-

Input Voltage

E1-01= 3 90VAC

(310~510)

"380VAC"

E2-01 = 00 7 .20A

(0.80 ~ 16.00)

"7.00A"

Fig 3.28 Operations in Verify Mode

-12

Autotuning Mode

Autotuning automatically measures and sets the required motor data in order to achieve the maximum performance. Always perform autotuning before starting operation when using the vector control modes.

When V/f control has been selected, stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be selected only.

When the motor cannot be operated (e.g. if the ropes cannot be removed from the traction sheave), and Open

Loop or Closed Loop Vector Control shall be used, perform stationary autotuning.

Example of Operation for V/f control

The tuning method for V/f control is fixed to the measurement of the terminal resistance (T1-01=1). Input the the rated output power and the rated current specified on the nameplate of the motor and then press the RUN key. The motor data are measured automatically.

Always set the above items. Otherwise autotuning cannot be started, e.g. it cannot be started from the motor rated voltage input display.

A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter will be saved when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.

The following flowchart shows a V/f control Autotuning example.

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

ESC

-A.TUNE-

Tuning Mode Sel

T1 01 =2 *2*

Term Resistance

"2"

ESC

-A.TUNE-

Mtr Rated Power

T1 02 = 4.00kW

(0.00~650.00)

"4.00kW"

ESC

-A.TUNE-

Rated Current

T1 04 = 7.00A

(0.80 ~ 16.00A)

"7.00A"

ESC

-A.TUNE-

Auto-Tuning

Rdy

0.0Hz/0.0A

Tuning Ready ?

Press RUN key

RUN

The display will automatically change depending on the status of autotuning.

-A.TUNE-

Tuning Mode Sel

01 = 2 *2*

Term Resistance

"2"

-A.TUNE-

Mtr Rated Power

T1-02 = 0 04.00kW

(0.0~400.0)

"4.00kW"

-A.TUNE-

Rated Current

T1-04 = 0 07.00A

(0.80 ~ 16.00A)

"7.00A"

-A.TUNE-

Tune Proceeding

40.0Hz/10.5A

START GOAL

STOP

STOP key

Fig 3.29 Operation in Autotuning Mode

If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to

Chapter 6, Troubleshooting .

-A.TUNE-

Tune Proceeding

40.0Hz/10.5A

START GOAL

-A.TUNE-

Tune Proceeding

Tune Successful

-A.TUNE-

Tune Successful

User Parameters

This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Inverter.

User Parameter Descriptions.......................................4-2

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........4-3

User Parameter Tables................................................4-7

-2

User Parameter Descriptions

This section describes the contents of the user parameter tables.

Description of User Parameter Tables

User parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an example.

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Page b1-01

Reference selection

Sets the frequency reference input method.

0: Digital Operator/Monitor

1: Control circuit terminal

(analog input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option Card

0 to 3 0 No Q Q Q 180H -

• Parameter Number:

• Name:

• Display

• Description:

• Setting Range:

• Factory Setting:

• Change during Operation:

• Control Methods:

• MEMOBUS Register:

• Page:

The number of the user parameter.

The name of the user parameter.

The display shown in the Digital Operator JVOP-160

Details on the function or settings of the user parameter.

The setting range for the user parameter.

The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.

Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed.)

Refer to page

page 4-51, Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)

for factory settings that are changed by setting the control method.

Indicates whether the parameter can be changed or not while the

Inverter is in operation.

Yes: Changes are possible during operation.

No: Changes are not possible during operation.

Indicates the control methods in which the user parameter can be monitored or set.

Q: The item can be monitored and set as well in quick programming mode as in advanced programming mode.

A: The item can be monitored and set in advanced programming mode only.

No: The item cannot be monitored or set in this control method.

The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.

Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter.

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

The following figure shows the Digital Operator/Monitor display hierarchy for the Inverter.

Drive Mode

Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed.

Quick Programming Mode

Minimum parameters required for operation can be monitored or set.

Advanced Programming Mode

All parameters can be monitored or set.

Verify Mode

Parameters changed from the default settings can be monitored or set.

Autotuning Mode

Automatically sets motor parameters for vector control or measures the line-to-line resistance for V/f control.

Function

Status Monitor Parameters

Fault Trace

Fault History

Initialize Mode

User-specified Setting Mode

Operation Mode Selections

DC Injection Braking

Timer Function

Dwell Functions

Acceleration/Deceleration

S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration

Motor Slip Compensation

Torque Compensation

Speed Control (ASR)

Carrier Frequency

Speed References

Field Forcing

V/f Pattern

Motor Setup

PG Option Setup

Analog Momitor Card

Digital Output Card

Serial Communications Settings

Multi-function Digital Inputs

Multi-function Digital Outputs

Multi-function Analog Inputs

Motor Overload

Power Loss Ridethrough

Stall Prevention

Reference Detection

Fault Restart

Torque Detection

Torque Limits

Hardware Protection

Automatic Frequency Regulator

Monitor Selection

Digital Operator/Monitor Functions

Copy Function

Brake Sequence

Slip Compensation

Special Sequence Functions

Motor Autotuning

H3 d6

C6 d1 b4 b6

A2 b1 b2 o1 o2 o3

No.

Page

4-45

4-49

4-50

4-20

4-22

4-23

4-24

4-25

4-26

4-14

4-15

4-16

4-17

4-18

4-7

4-8

4-9

4-10

4-11

4-12

4-13

4-33

4-34

4-36

4-37

4-38

4-40

4-28

4-30

4-31

4-32

4-40

4-43

4-44

-4

User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode

The minimum user parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode. The user parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user parameters, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

A1-02

C1-01

C1-02

Control method selection

Control Method

Sets the control method for the Inverter.

0: V/f control

2: Open-Loop Vector control

3: Closed Loop Vector control

Acceleration time 1 Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output fre-

Accel Time 1 quency.

Deceleration time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0

Decel Time 1

Hz.

C2-01

C2-02

C2-03

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start

S-Crv Acc @ Start

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end

S-Crv Acc @ End

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start

S-Crv Dec @ Start

When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.

C2-04

C2-05

C5-01

C5-02

C5-03

C5-04

C5-06

0 to 3

0.0 to

600.00

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 to

2.50

1.50 s

0.50 s

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end

S-Crv Dec @ End

S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed

Scurve @ leveling

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 to

2.50

0.50 s

ASR proportional

(P) gain 1

ASR P Gain 1

ASR integral time 1

ASR I Time 1

Set the proportional gain 1 and the integral time 1 of the speed control loop

(ASR) for the minimum frequency.

The settings becomes active for acceleration only.

ASR proportional

(P) gain 2

ASR P Gain 2

Set the proportional gain 2 and the integral time 2 of the speed control loop

(ASR) for the maximum frequency.

ASR integral (I) time 2

ASR I Time 2

ASR delay time

ASR Delay Time

0.00 to

300.00

0.000 to

10.000

0.00 to

300.00

0.000 to

10.000

Sets the filter time constant; the time from the speed loop to the torque command output. Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

0.000 to

0.500

40.00

0.500 s

20.00

0.500 s

0.004

Yes

Control Methods

MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Registe r

102H

200H

201H

20BH

20CH

20DH

20EH

232H

21BH

21CH

21DH

21EH

220H

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

Parameter Number

C5-09

C5-10 d1-09

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

ASR proportional

(P) gain 3

ASR P Gain 3

ASR integral (I) time 3

ASR I Time 3

Set the proportional gain 3 and the integral time 3 of the speed control loop

(ASR) for the minimum frequency.

The settings becomes active for deceleration only.

Nominal speed reference

Nomin Speed vn

Sets the frequency reference when the nominal speed is selected by a digital input.

0.00 to

300.00

40.00

0.000 to

10.000

0.500 s

50.00 Hz

Yes

Yes d1-14 d1-17

E1-01

E1-04

E1-05

E1-06

E1-08

E1-09

E1-10

E2-01

E2-02

E2-03

E2-04

Inspection speed reference

Inspect Speed vi

Leveling speed reference

Level Speed vl

Sets the frequency reference when the inspection speed is selected by a digital input

Sets the frequency reference when the leveling speed is selected by a digital input

Input voltage setting

Input

Voltage

Max. output frequency (FMAX)

Max Frequency

Sets the inverter input voltage. This set value will be the basis for the protection functions.

Max. voltage

(VMAX)

Max Voltage

Base frequency

(FA)

Base Frequency

Mid. output frequency voltage

(VB)

Mid voltage A

Min. output frequency (FMIN)

Min Frequency

Min. output frequency voltage

(VMIN)

Min Voltage

Motor rated current Sets the motor rated current in Amps.

This set value becomes the base value for

Mtr Rated Power motor protection and torque limit. It is an input data for autotuning.

Motor rated slip

Motor Rated Slip

Sets the motor rated slip.

This set value will become the reference value for the slip compensation.

This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.

Motor no-load current

No-Load Current

Sets the motor no-load current.

This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.

Number of motor poles

Number of Poles

Sets the number of motor poles. It is an input data for autotuning.

0 to

120.00

155 to

255

40.0 to

120.0

0.0 to

255.0

0.0 to

120.0

0.0 to

255

0.0 to

120.0

0.0 to

255.0

1.75 to

35.00

0.00 to

20.00

0.00 to

13.99

2 to 48

25.00 Hz Yes

4.00 Hz Yes

200 V

50.0 Hz No

190.0 V

50.0 Hz

12.5 V

*1 *2

0.3 Hz

2.5 V

*1 *2

14.00 A

2.73 Hz

4.50 A

Control Methods

MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Registe r

22EH

231H

288H

28FH

292H

300H

303H

304H

305H

No 307H

A 308H

No 309H

30EH

30FH

310H

311H

-6

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

E2-05

E2-11

F1-01

F1-05

L1-01

Motor line-to-line resistance

Term Resistance

Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.

This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.

Motor rated output power

Mtr Rated Power

Sets the rated output power of the motor.

This parameter is an input data for autotuning.

PG constant

PG Pulses/Rev

PG rotation

Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution

PG Rotation Sel

Motor protection selection

MOL Select

0: Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command.)

1: Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command.)

Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.

0: Disabled

1: Protection for general purpose motor

(fan cooled)

2: Protection for frequency converter motor (external cooled)

3: Protection for special vector control motor

0.000

65.000

0.00 to

650.00

0 to

60000

0 or 1

0 to 3

0.771

Ω

3.70

1024

Control Methods

MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Registe r

312H

318H

380H

384H

480H

* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to

0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).

* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.

* 3. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)

* 4. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.

* 5. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)

* 6. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)

User Parameter Tables

A: Setup Settings

Initialize Mode: A1

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

A1-00

Language selection for Digital

Operator display

Select

Language

Used to select the language displayed on the Digital Operator

(JVOP-160 only).

0: English

1: Japanese

2: German

3: French

4: Italian

5: Spanish

6: Portuguese

This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation.

A1-01

Parameter access level

Access Level

Used to set the parameter access level (set/read.)

0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting A1-

01 and A1-04.)

1: Used to select user parameters (Only parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)

2: Advanced

(Parameters can be read and set in both, quick programming mode (Q) and advanced programming mode (A).)

A1-02

A1-03

Control method selection

Control Method

Used to select the control method for the Inverter

0: V/f control

2: Open loop vector

3: Closed Loop Vector

This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation.

Initialize

Init Parameters

Used to initialize the parameters using the specified method.

0: No initializing

1110: Initializes using the user parameters

2220: Initializes using a twowire sequence.

(Initializes to the factory setting.)

Setting

Range

0 to 6

0 to 2

0 to 3

0 to

2220

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Yes

Control Methods

V/ f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

100H

101H

102H

103H

–

5-63

5-64

A1-04

Password

Enter Password

Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.

This function write-protects some parameters of the initialize mode.

If the password is changed, A1-

01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 parameters can no longer be changed. (Programming mode parameters can be changed.)

0 to

9999

0 No A A A 104H

5-63

-8

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display

A1-05

Password setting

Select Password

Used to set a four digit number as the password.

Usually this parameter is not displayed. When the Password (A1-

04) is displayed, hold down the

RESET key and press the Menu key. The password will be displayed.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0 to

9999

0 No

Control Methods

V/ f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

A A A 105H

5-63

User-set Parameters: A2

The parameters set by the user are listed in the following table.

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Page

A2-01 to

A2-32

User specified parameters

User Param 1 to

Used to select the function for each of the user specified parameters. User parameters are the only accessible parameters if Parameter Access Level is set to user parameters (A1-01=1) b1-01 to

S3-01

– No A A A

106H to

125H

5-64

User Parameter Tables

Application Parameters: b

Operation Mode Selections: b1

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

Description b1-01 b1-02 b1-06 b1-08

Reference source selection

Reference

Source

Sets the frequency reference input method.

0: Digital Operator/Monitor

1: Control circuit terminal

(analog input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option Card

RUN command source selection

Run Source

Control input scan

Cntl Input

Scans

Sets the run command input method.

0: Digital Operator/Monitor

1: Control circuit terminal

(digital multifunction inputs)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option Card

Used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs (forward/ reverse and multi-function inputs.)

0: Fast reading

1: Normal reading (Can be used for possible malfunction due to noise.)

Run command selection in programming modes

RUN CMD at

PRG

Used to set an operation prohibition in programming modes.

0: Operation prohibited.

1: Operation permitted

(Disabled when Digital

Operator/Monitor is the selected Run command source

(b1-02 = 0)).

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0 to 3

0 or 1

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

180H

181H

185H

187H

5-5

5-4

DC Injection Braking: b2

Name

Parameter Number

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation b2-08

Magnetic flux compensation volume

Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the noload current.

Field Comp

0 to

1000

0% No No

Control Methods MEMO-

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

BUS

Page

A No 190H -

-10

Timer Function: b4

Param eter

Number

Name Description b4-01

Timer function

ON-delay time

Delay-ON

Timer

Sets the timer function output ONdelay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.

Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2-.

b4-02

Timer function

OFF-delay time

Delay-OFF

Timer

Sets the timer function output OFFdelay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.

Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2-.

Setting

Range

0.0 to

3000.0

0.0 to

3000.0

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

0.0 s

1A3H

1A4H

Page

5-44

Dwell Functions: b6

Parameter

Number

Name

Display b6-01

Dwell frequency at start

Dwell Ref @

Start b6-02

Dwell time at start

Dwell Time

@ Start b6-03

Dwell frequency at stop

Dwell Ref @

Stop b6-04

Dwell time at stop

Dwell Time

@ Stop

Description

Run command

Output frequency

OFF b6-02 b6-01 b6-03 b6-04

Time

The dwell function can be used to hold the output frequency temporarily.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

0.0 to

120.0

0.0 Hz

0.0 to

10.0

0.0 s

0.0 to

120.0

0.0 Hz

0.0 to

10.0

0.0 s

1B6H

5-20

1B7H

5-20

1B8H

5-20

1B9H

5-20

User Parameter Tables

Tuning Parameters: C

Acceleration/Deceleration: C1

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Setting

Range

Display

C1-01

Acceleration time 1 Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the

Accel Time 1 maximum output frequency.

C1-02

Deceleration time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum

Decel Time 1 output frequency to 0 Hz.

C1-03

Acceleration time 2 Sets the acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/

Accel Time 2 decel time 1” is set to ON.

C1-04

Deceleration time 2 Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/

Decel Time 2 decel time 1” is set to ON.

C1-07

Acceleration time 4 Sets the acceleration time when

Accel Time 4 the frequency reference is below the value set in C1-11.

0.00 to

600.00

C1-08

Deceleration time 4 Sets the deceleration time when the frequency reference is

Decel Time 4 below the value set in C1-11.

C1-09

Emergency stop time

Fast Stop Time

Sets the deceleration time when the frequency reference is below the value set in C1-11.

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

1.50 s

Yes

200H

201H

202H

203H

206H

207H

208H

5-17

5-10

C1-10

Accel/decel time setting unit

Acc/Dec Units

0: 0.01-second units

1: 0.1-second units

C1-11

Accel/decel time switching frequency

Acc/Dec SW Freq

Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.

If the output frequency is below the set frequency: Accel/decel time 4

If the output frequency is above the set frequency: Accel/decel time 1.

0 or 1

0.0 to

120.0

0.0 Hz

209H

20AH

5-17

5-18

* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10. If C1-10 is set to 1, the setting range for acceleration/deceleration times becomes 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds.

-12

S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

C2-01

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start

S-Crv Acc @

Start

0.00 to

2.50

C2-02

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end

Set the S-curve times at speed changes to reduce the jerk. The S-curves can be set separately for every kind of speed change.

S-Crv Acc @

End

C2-02 C2-03

0.00 to

2.50

0.50 s

20BH

20CH

Page

5-19

C2-03

C2-04

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start

C2-01

C2-04

C2-05

Time

S-Crv Dec @

Start

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end

S-Crv Dec @

End

T accel

= C2-01

T decel

= C2-03

When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 to

2.50

C2-05

S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed

Scurve @ leveling

0.00 to

2.50

0.50 s

20DH

20EH

232H

5-19

User Parameter Tables

Motor Slip Compensation: C3

Parameter Number

C3-01

C3-02

C3-03

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Slip compensation gain

Slip Comp Gain

Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

Adjust this parameter under the following circumstances.

• When motor speed is lower than the frequency reference increase the set value.

• When motor speed is higher than the frequency reference decrease the set value.

In Closed Loop Vector control this value is the gain for compensating the slip caused by temperature variation.

0.0 to 2.5

1.0

Slip compensation delay time

Slip Comp Time

Sets the Slip Compensation delay time.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

Adjust this parameter under the following circumstances.

• Reduce the setting when Slip

Compensation responsiveness is low.

• When speed is not stable, increase the setting.

Slip compensation limit

Slip Comp Limit

Sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip.

0 to

10000

0 to

250

2000 ms

200%

Yes

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

20FH

210H

211H

5-26

C3-04

Slip compensation selection during regeneration

Slip Comp Regen

0: Disabled.

1: Enabled.

When the slip compensation during regeneration function has been activated and regeneration capacity increases momentarily, it might be necessary to use a braking option

(braking resistor, braking resistor unit or braking unit.)

C3-05

Output voltage limit operation selection

Output V limit Sel

0: Disabled.

1: Enabled. (The motor flux will be lowered automatically when the output voltage become saturated.)

0 or 1

212H

213H

5-26

-14

Torque Compensation: C4

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Setting

Range

Display

C4-01

Torque compensation gain

Torq Comp Gain

Sets the torque compensation gain.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

Adjust it under the following circumstances:

• When the cable is long increase the set value.

• When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (Max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set values.

• When the motor is oscillating, decrease the set values.

Adjust the torque compensation gain so that at minimum speed the output current does not exceed the Inverter rated output current.

Do not change the torque compensation gain from its default

(1.00) when using Open Loop

Vector control.

0.00 to

2.50

C4-02

Torque compensation delay time constant

Torq Comp Time

The torque compensation delay time is set in ms units.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

Adjust it under the following circumstances:

• When the motor is oscillating, increase the set values.

• When the responsiveness of the motor is low, decrease the set values.

C4-03

Starting torque compensation

(FWD)

Sets the torque compensation value at start in FWD direction

FTorqCmp @ Start

0 to

10000

0.0 to

200.0%

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

1.00

200 ms

0.0%

Yes

215H

216H

217H

5-27

5-26

C4-04

Starting torque compensation

(REV)

RTorqCmp @ Start

Sets the torque compensation value at start in REV direction

-200.0% to 0.0

0.0%

C4-05

Starting torque compensation time constant

TorqCmpDelayT

Sets starting torque start-up time.

When 0 ~ 4 ms is set, it is operated without filter.

0 to 200 10 ms

218H

5-26

219H

5-26

* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)

User Parameter Tables

Speed Control (ASR): C5

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

ASR propor-

C5-01

C5-02

ASR P Gain 1

ASR integral (I) time 1

ASR I Time 1 loop (ASR) for the minimum frequency.

The settings becomes active for acceleration only.

1.00 to

300.00

0.000 to

10.000

40.00

0.500 s

Yes

C5-03

C5-04

ASR proportional (P) gain 2 Set the proportional gain 2 and the

ASR P Gain 2

ASR integral (I) time 2 integral time 2 of the speed control loop (ASR) for the maximum frequency.

ASR I Time 2

1.00 to

300.00

0.000 to

10.000

C5-06

ASR delay time Sets the filter time constant; the time from the speed loop to the torque

ASR Delay Time command output. Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

0.000 to

0.500

20.00

0.500 s Yes

0.004

Yes

C5-08

ASR integral (I) limit

ASR I Limit

Set the parameter to a small value to prevent any radical load change. A setting of 100% is equal to the maximum output frequency.

0 to 400 400%

ASR propor-

C5-09

C5-10

ASR P Gain 3

ASR integral (I) time 3

ASR I Time 3 loop (ASR) for the minimum frequency.

The settings becomes active for deceleration only.

1.00 to

300.00

0.000 to

10.000

40.00

0.500 s

Yes

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

No No

21BH

21CH

21DH

21EH

220H

222H

22EH

231H

Page

5-29

5-26

Carrier Frequency: C6

Parameter

Number

Name

Description

Display

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

CarrierFreq Sel

Selects the carrier frequency.

1: 2 kHz

2: 5 kHz

3: 8 kHz

4: 10 kHz

5: 12.5 kHz

6: 15 kHz

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

1 to 6 3 No A A A 224H

5-2

-16

Reference Parameters: d

Preset Reference: d1

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-14 d1-17

Frequency reference 1

Reference 1

Frequency reference 2

Reference 2

Frequency reference 3

Reference 3

Frequency reference 4

Reference 4

Sets the frequency reference.

Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 1 is ON for a multi-function input.

Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 2 is ON for a multi-function input.

Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and

2 are ON for multi-function inputs.

Frequency reference 5

Reference 5

Frequency reference 6

Reference 6

Sets the frequency when multi-step speed command 3 is ON for a multi-function input.

Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and

3 are ON for multi-function inputs.

Frequency reference 7

Reference 7

Frequency reference 8

Reference 8

Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 2 and

3 are ON for multi-function inputs.

Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1, 2, and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.

Nominal speed Sets the frequency reference when the nominal speed is selected by a

Nomin Speed vn digital input.

Intermediate speed 1

Interm Speed v1

Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 1 is selected by a digital input.

0 to

120.00

*1*2

Intermediate speed 2

Interm Speed v2

Intermediate speed 3

Interm Speed v3

Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 2 is selected by a digital input.

Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 3 is selected by a digital input.

Releveling speed Sets the frequency reference when the releveling speed is selected by

Relevel Speed vr a digital input.

Inspection speed Sets the frequency reference when the inspection speed is selected by

Inspect Speed vi a digital input.

Leveling Speed Sets the frequency reference when the leveling speed is selected by a

Level Speed vl digital input.

0.00 Hz

50.00 Hz Yes

0.00 Hz

25.00 Hz Yes

4.00 Hz

Yes

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

280H

281H

282H

283H

284H

285H

286H

287H

288H

28BH

28CH

28DH

28EH

28FH

292H

5-6

5-7

5-8

5-7

5-8

5-7

5-8

5-7

5-8

5-7

5-8

5-7

5-8

5-7

5-8

User Parameter Tables

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page d1-18

Speed priority selection

SpeedPrioritySel

Speed reference priority selection

0: Use Multi-Speed reference

(d1-01 to d1-08)

1: High Speed reference has

priority.

2: Leveling speed reference

has priority.

0 to 2 1 Yes A A A 292H

5-6

5-7

5-8

* 1. The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz). If the display unit is changed, the setting range values also change

* 2. The maximum setting value depends on the setting of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).

Field Forcing: d6

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display d6-03

Field forcing function selection

Field Force

Sel

Enables or disables field forcing function.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Setting

Range

0 or 1 d6-06

Field forcing function

Limit

FieldForce

Limit

Sets the upper limit for the excitation current applied by the field forcing function.

A setting of 100% is equal to the motor no-load current.

Field forcing is active during all types of operation except DC Injection.

100 to

400

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

400%

2A2H

2A5H

5-33

-18

Motor Parameters: E

V/f Pattern: E1

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

E1-01

E1-04

Input voltage setting

Input

Voltage

Sets the Inverter input voltage.

This setting is used as a reference value for protection functions.

Max. output frequency

(FMAX)

E1-05

E1-06

Max Frequency

Max. output voltage (VMAX)

Max Voltage

Base frequency

(FA)

Base Frequency

Output Voltage (V)

E1-07

E1-08

E1-09

E1-10

E1-13

Mid. output frequency (FB)

Mid Frequency A

Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)

Mid Voltage A

Min. output frequency

(FMIN)

Min Frequency

Frequency (Hz)

To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and

E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-

08 will be disregarded.

Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:

E1-04 (FMAX)

≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07

(FB)

≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)

Min Voltage

Base voltage

(VBASE)

Base Voltage

Sets the output voltage of the base frequency (E1-06).

155 to

255

40.0 to

120.0

50.0 Hz No

0.0 to

255.0

0.0 to

120.0

0.0 to

120.0

0.0 to

255

0.0 to

120.0

0.0 to

255.0

0.0 to

255.0

200 V

190.0 V

50.0 Hz

3.0 Hz

20.0 V

*1 *2

0.5 Hz

12.5 V

*1 *2

0.0 V

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

300H

303H

304H

305H

306H

307H

308H

309H

30CH

5-55

* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.

* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (The V/f Control factory settings are given.)

* 3. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.

Motor Setup: E2

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display

E2-01

Motor rated current

Motor Rated

FLA

Sets the motor rated current.

This set value will become the reference value for motor protection and torque limits.

This parameter is an input data for autotuning.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

1.75 to

35.00

14.00 A

No Q Q Q 30EH

5-50

User Parameter Tables

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

E2-02

E2-03

E2-04

E2-05

E2-06

E2-07

E2-08

E2-09

E2-10

E2-11

E2-12

Motor rated slip

Motor Rated

Slip

Sets the motor rated slip.

This set value will become the reference value for the slip compensation.

This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.

Motor noload current

No-Load Current

Sets the motor no-load current.

This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.

Number of motor poles

Number of

Poles

Sets the number of motor poles.

This value is an input data for autotuning.

Motor line-toline resistance

Term Resistance

Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.

This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.

Motor leak inductance

Leak Inductance

Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.

This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.

Motor iron saturation coefficient 1

Saturation

Comp1

Motor iron saturation coefficient 2

Saturation

Comp2

Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.

This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning.

Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.

This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning.

Motor mechanical losses

Mechanical loss

Sets the motor mechanical losses as a percentage of motor rated output.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

Adjust the value under the following the torque loss is large due e.g. to heavy friction in the machine.

The set mechanical loss will be compensated.

Motor iron loss for torque compensation Sets motor iron losses.

Tcomp Iron

Loss

Motor rated output power

Mtr Rated

Power

Sets the rated output power of the motor.

This parameter is an input data for autotuning.

Motor iron saturation coefficient 3 This parameter is automatically set dur-

Saturation ing rotating autotuning.

Comp3

0.00 to

20.00

0.00 to

13.99

0.000

65.000

0.0 to

40.0

0.00 to

0.50

0.50 to

0.75

0.0 to

10.0

0 to

65535

0.00 to

650.00

1.30 to

1.60

2.73 Hz

4.50 A

2 to 48 4 poles

0.771

19.6%

0.50

0.75

0.0%

112 W

3.70

1.30

Ω

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

30FH

310H

311H

312H

313H

314H

315H

316H

317H

318H

5-50

* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.

* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.

* 3. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.

-20

Option Parameters: F

PG Option Setup: F1

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Setting

Range

Display

F1-01

F1-02

F1-03

F1-04

F1-05

PG constant

PG Pulses/Rev

Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution

Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)

PG Fdbk Loss

Sel

Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.

0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1, C1-02.)

1: Coast to stop

2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in

C1-09.)

3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, avoid to use this setting.)

Operation selection at overspeed (OS)

PG Overspeed

Sel

Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs.

0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1, C1-02.)

1: Coast to stop

2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in

C1-09.)

3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, avoid to use this setting.)

Operation selection at speed deviation

Deviation Sel

Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs.

0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1, C1-02.)

1: Coast to stop

2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in

C1-09.)

3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and operation continued.)

PG rotation

PG Rotation Sel

0: Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command; Counter Clockwise rotation)

1: Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command; Clockwise rotation)

0 to

60000

0 to 3

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

1024

380H

381H

382H

383H

384H

5-65

5-66

5-67

5-65

User Parameter Tables

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

F1-06

PG division rate

(PG pulse monitor)

PG Output Ratio

Sets the division ratio for the PG speed control card pulse output.

Division ratio = (1+ n) /m

(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)

The first digit of the value of F1-

06 stands for n, the second and the third stands for m.

This parameter is effective only when a PG-B2 is used.

The possible division ratio settings are: 1/32

≤ F1-06

≤ 1.

1 to 132

F1-14

PG open-circuit detection delay time

PGO Detect

Time

Used to set the PG disconnection detection time. PGO will be detected if the detection time exceeds the set time.

0.0 to

10.0

F1-08

F1-09

Overspeed detection level

PG Overspd

Level

Overspeed detection delay time

PG Overspd

Time

Sets the overspeed detection method.

Motor speeds that continue to exceed the value set in F1-08

(set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) for the time set in F1-09 are detected as overspeed faults.

0 to 120 115%

0.0 to 2.0

0.0 s

F1-10

F1-11

Excessive speed deviation detection level

PG Deviate

Level

Excessive speed deviation detection delay time

PG Deviate Time

Sets the speed deviation detection method.

Any speed deviation above the

F1-10 set level (set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is detected as a speed deviation.

The speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the speed reference command.

0 to 50

0.0 to

10.0

10%

0.5 s

1.0 s

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

385H

387H

388H

389H

38AH

38DH

5-66

5-67

5-66

-22

Analog Monitor Cards: F4

Parameter

Number

Name

F4-01

Channel 1 monitor selection

AO Ch1 Select

F4-02

Channel 1 gain

AO Ch1 Gain

F4-03

Channel 2 monitor selection

AO Ch2 Select

F4-04

Channel 2 gain

AO Ch2 Gain

F4-05

Channel 1 output monitor bias

AO Ch1 Bias

Channel 2 output monitor bias

F4-06

AO Ch2 Bias

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Page

Using an AO-08 option card the possible outputs signal is 0 to +10V only. The setting of F4-07 and F4-

08 has no effect.

Sets the channel 1 item bias to

100%/10 V when the analog monitor card is used.

This function is enabled when the analog monitor card is used.

1 to 54

0.0 to

1000.0

1 to 54

Monitor selection: Sets the number of the monitor item to be output.

(Numerical portion of U1-

)

4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 35, 39 and 40 cannot be set.

-110.0 to

110.0

Gain: Sets the percentage of the monitor item, which is equal to 10V output.

0.0 to

1000.0

100.0% Yes

50.0%

0.0%

Yes

391H

392H

393H

394H

395H

Bias: Sets the percentage of the monitor item, which is equal to 0V output.

-110.0 to

110.0

0.0% Yes A A A 396H

F4-07

Analog output signal level for channel 1

AO Opt Level Sel

Selects the analog output signal level for channel 1 (effective for the

AO-12 option card only).

Analog output signal level for channel 2

0: 0 to 10V

1:-10 to +10

F4-08

AO Opt Level Sel

Using an AO-08 option card the possible outputs signal is 0 to +10V only. The setting of F4-07 and F4-

08 has no effect.

0 or 1

397H

398H

User Parameter Tables

Digital Output Card (DO-02 and DO-08): F5

Constant

Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

MEMO

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

BUS

Page

F5-01

Channel 1 output selection

DO Ch1 Select

F5-02

Channel 2 output selection

DO Ch2 Select

F5-03

Channel 3 output selection

DO Ch3 Select

F5-04

Channel 4 output selection

DO Ch4 Select

F5-05

Channel 5 output selection

DO Ch5 Select

F5-06

Channel 6 output selection

DO Ch6 Select

F5-07

Channel 7 output selection

DO Ch7 Select

F5-08

Channel 8 output selection

DO Ch8 Select

DO-08 output mode selection

F5-09

DO-08 Selection

Effective when a Digital Output

Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.

Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.

Effective when a Digital Output

Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.

Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.

Effective when a DO-08 Digital

Output Card is used.

Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.

Effective when a DO-08 Digital

Output Card is used.

Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.

Effective when a DO-08 Digital

Output Card is used.

Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.

Effective when a DO-08 Digital

Output Card is used.

Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.

Effective when a DO-08 Digital

Output Card is used.

Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.

Effective when a DO-08 Digital

Output Card is used.

Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.

Effective when a DO-08 Digital

Output Card is used.

Set the output mode.

0: 8-channel individual outputs

1: Binary code output

2: Output according to

F5-01 to F5-08 settings.

0 to 42

0 to 2

399H

39AH

39BH

39CH

39DH

39EH

39FH

3A0H

3A1H

-24

Serial Communications Settings: F6

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display

F6-01

F6-02

F6-03

F6-05

F6-06

Operation selection after communications error

Comm Bus Fault

Sel

Sets the stopping method for communications errors.

0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09

3: Continue operation

Input level of external error from Communications Option

Card

EF0 Detection

0: Always detect

1: Detect during operation

Stopping method for external error from Communications Option

Card

EF0 Fault Action

0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09

3: Continue operation

Current monitor unit selection

Current Unit Sel

Sets the unit of current monitor

0: Ampere

1: 100%/8192

Torque reference/torque limit selection from communications option card

Torque Ref/Lmt

Sel

0: Torque reference/torque limit by communications option disabled.

1: Torque reference/torque limit by communications option enabled.

Setting

Range

0 to 3

0 or 1

0 to 3

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

3A2H

3A3H

3A4H

3A6H

3A7H

Page

User Parameter Tables

Terminal Function Parameters: H

Multi-function Digital Inputs: H1

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display

H1-01

Terminal S3 function selection

Terminal S3 Sel

H1-02

Terminal S4 function selection

Terminal S3 Sel

H1-03

Terminal S5 function selection

Terminal S3 Sel

H1-04

Terminal S6 function selection

Terminal S3 Sel

H1-05

Terminal S7 function selection

Terminal S3 Sel

Multi-function input 1

Multi-function input 2

Multi-function input 3

Multi-function input 4

Multi-function input 5

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

0 to 88 80 No A A A 400H

5-43

0 to 88 84

0 to 88 81

0 to 88 83

0 to 88 F

401H

5-43

402H

5-43

403H

5-43

404H

5-43

Multi-function Digital Input Functions

Setting

Value

Multi-step speed reference 1

Multi-step speed reference 2

Multi-step speed reference 3

Function

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes Yes Yes

Page

5-6

Yes Yes Yes

5-6

Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)

Accel/decel time 1 switchover

External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)

External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)

F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)

14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)

15 Emergency stop. (NO: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when ON.)

17 Emergency stop (NC: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when OFF)

Timer function input (the times are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function output is set in H2-.)

1A Accel/decel time switchover 2

Yes Yes Yes

5-18

Yes Yes Yes

5-10

Yes Yes Yes

5-10

Yes Yes Yes

5-44

Yes Yes Yes

5-18

20 to 2F External fault; Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation Yes Yes Yes

5-43

80 Nominal Speed Selection (d1-09) Yes Yes Yes

5-6

81 Intermediate Speed Selection (d1-10)

82 Releveling Speed Selection (d1-13)

Yes No No

Yes Yes Yes

5-6

83 Leveling Speed Selection (d1-17)

84 Inspection Run Selection (d1-14)

85 Battery Operation Selection

86 Output Contactor Answer Back Signal

Yes Yes Yes

5-6

-26

Setting

Value

87 High Speed Limit Switch (UP)

88 High Speed Limit Switch (Down)

Function

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Page

Yes Yes Yes

5-25

Yes Yes Yes

5-25

Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display

H2-01

Terminal M1-

M2 function selection

Multi-function contact output 1

Term

M1-M2 Sel

H2-02

Terminal M3-

M4 function selection

Multi-function contact output 2

Term

M3-M4 Sel

H2-03

Terminal M5-

M6 function selection

Multi-function contact output 3

Term

M5-M6 Sel

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

V/f

Control Methods

V/f with

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

0 to 43

40BH

5-47

40CH

5-47

40DH

5-47

Multi-function Contact Output Functions

Setting

Value

Function

Control Methods

V/f

Open loop

Vector

Yes Yes

Closed

Loop

Vector

Page

Yes

5-47

During run 1 (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)

Zero-speed f ref

/f out

agree 1 (detection width L4-02 is used.) f ref

/f set

agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used and during frequency agree)

Frequency detection 1 (ON: +L4-01

≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used)

Frequency detection 2 (ON: Output frequency

≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used)

F Not used. (Set when the terminal is not used.)

10 Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)

11 Fault reset command active

12 Timer function output

13 f ref

/f set

agree 2 (detection width L4-04 is used)

Yes

Inverter operation ready; READY: After initialization or no faults

During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection

During baseblock (NO contact, ON: during baseblock)

Frequency reference source selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)

Yes Yes

Run command source selection status (ON: Run command from Operator) Yes Yes

Car stuck/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact, ON: Overtorque/undertorque detection) Yes Yes

Yes Yes Braking transistor fault

Fault (ON: Digital Operator/Monitor communications error or fault other than CPF00 and

CPF01 has occurred.)

Yes Yes

Yes

5-47

Yes

5-23

Yes

5-23

Yes

5-23

Yes

5-23

Yes

5-48

Yes

5-48

Yes

5-48

Yes

5-48

Yes

5-48

Yes

5-34

Yes -

Yes

5-48

Yes -

Yes

5-48

Yes

5-48

Yes

5-44

Yes

5-23

User Parameter Tables

Setting

Value

Function

14 f ref

/f set

agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, with detection width L4-04 is used, and during frequency agree)

15 Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency

≤ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is used)

16 Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency

≥ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is used)

17 Car stuck/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)

18 Car stuck/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact, ON: Torque detection)

19 Car stuck/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)

1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)

1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)

1D During regenerative operation

1E Restart enabled (ON: Automativ fault restart enabled)

1F Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)

20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)

30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)

31 During speed limit

33 Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-Servo completed)

During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)

38 During cooling fan operation

40 Brake Release Command

41 Output Contactor Cloase Command

42 Speed detection at deceleration (Door zone)

43 Not Zero Speed

Control Methods

V/f

Open loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Page

Yes Yes Yes

5-23

Yes Yes Yes

5-23

Yes Yes Yes

5-23

Yes Yes Yes

5-34

Yes Yes Yes

5-34

Yes Yes Yes

5-34

Yes Yes Yes

5-48

Yes Yes Yes

5-48

No No Yes

5-49

Yes Yes Yes -

Yes Yes Yes

5-38

Yes Yes Yes

5-40

Yes Yes Yes

5-37

Yes

5-23

Yes -

Yes Yes Yes

5-47

Yes Yes Yes -

Yes Yes Yes

5-11

Yes Yes Yes

5-11

Yes Yes Yes

5-49

Yes Yes Yes

5-49

-28

Analog Inputs: H3

Constant

Number

H3-01

H3-02

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

MEMO

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

BUS

Page

AI-14B Channel 1 signal level selection

AI-14 CH1 LvlSel

Selects the input signal level of

Channel 1 if an AI-14B option card is installed.

0: 0 to +10V

1: -10 to +10V

AI-14B Channel 1 gain

AI-14 CH1 Gain

Sets the frequency reference value when 10 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.

0 or 1

0.0 to

1000.0

0 No

100.0% Yes

410H

5-22

411H

5-22

H3-03

H3-04

H3-05

H3-06

H3-07

H3-08

H3-09

H3-10

H3-11

AI-14B Channel 1 bias

AI-14 CH1 Bias

AI-14B Channel 3 signal level selection

AI-14 CH3 LvlSel

Selects the input signal level of

Channel 3 if an AI-14B option card is installed.

0: 0 to 10V

1: -10 to +10V

AI-14B Channel 3 function selection

AI-14 CH3FuncSel

Sets the frequency reference value when 0 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.

Selects the function for the channel 3 input if an AI-14B option card is installed. See the table below for the available functions.

AI-14B Channel3 gain

AI-14 CH3 Gain

AI-14B Channel 3

Bias

AI-14 CH3 Bias

Sets the input level according to the 100% value of the function set in parameter H3-05 when the voltage at channel 3 of the

AI-14B option card is 10 V .

Sets the input level according to the 0% value of the function set in parameter H3-05 when the voltage at channel 3 of the

AI-14B option card is 0 V.

-100.0

+100.0

0 or 1

2,3,14

0.0 to

1000.0

-100.0 to

+100.0

0.0%

100.0%

0.0%

Yes

AI-14B Channel 2 signal level selection

AI-14 CH2 LvlSel

Selects the input signal level of

Channel 2 if an AI-14B option card is installed.

0: 0 to 10V

1: -10 to +10V

2: 4 to 20 mA.

If current input is selected, channel 2 must be set to current input by hardware as well. Refer to the

AI-14B manual.

AI-14B Channel 2 function selection

AI-14 CH2FuncSel

Selects the function for the channel 2 input if an AI-14B option card is installed. See the table below for the available functions.

0 to 2

2, 3, 14

AI-14B Channel 2

Gain

AI-14 CH2 Gain

AI-14B Channel 2

Bias

AI-14 CH2 Bias

Sets the input level according to the 100% value of the function set in parameter H3-09 when the voltage/current at channel 2 of the AI-14B option card is 10V/

20mA.

Sets the input level according to the 0% value of the function set in parameter H3-09 when the voltage/current at channel 2 of the AI-14B option card is 0V/

0mA.

0.0 to

1000.0

-100.0

+100.0

100.0% Yes

0.0%

Yes

412H

5-22

413H

5-22

414H

5-22

415H

5-22

416H

5-22

417H

5-22

418H

5-22

419H

5-22

41AH

5-22

User Parameter Tables

Constant

Number

Name

Display

H3-12

Analog input filter time constant

CH1-3 FilterTime

H3-15

Terminal A1 function selection

Terminal A1 Func

H3-16

Terminal A1 input gain

Terminal A1 Gain

H3-17

Terminal A1 input bias

Terminal A1 Bias

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

MEMO

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

BUS

Page

Sets delay filter time constant for the three analog input channels of the AI-14B option card .

Effective for noise control etc.

0.00 to

2.00

0.03

No A A A 41BH

5-22

Sets the multi-function analog input function for terimnal A1.

0: Frequency Reference

1: Torque compensation

Sets the frequency reference value when 10 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.

0 or 1

0.0 to

1000.0

Sets the frequency reference value when 0 V is input as a percentage of the maximum frequency set in E1-04.

-100.0

+100.0

100.0% Yes

0.0%

Yes

No No

434H

5-22

435H

5-22

436H

5-22

H3-05,H3-09 Settings

Setting

Value

Function Contents (100%)

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vectorop

Closed

Loop

Vector

Page

Maximum output frequency (AI-14B use only) Yes Yes Yes 2

Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as multi speed reference 2)

Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as multi speed reference 3)

14 Torque compensation

Maximum output frequency (AI-14B use only) Yes Yes Yes

Motor’s rated torque No No Yes

5-11

-30

Protection Function Parameters: L

Motor Overload: L1

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display

L1-01

L1-02

Motor protection selection

MOL Fault

Select

Sets whether the motor thermal overload protection function is enabled or disabled.

0: Disabled

1: General-purpose motor protection

(fan cooled motor)

2: Inverter motor protection

(externally cooled motor)

3: Vector motor protection

When the Inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this parameter is set to 1, protection may not be effective.

Motor protection time constant

MOL Time

Const

Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.

When the motor's overload capability is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started.

Setting

Range

0 to 3

0.1 to

5.0

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

1.0 min

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

480H

481H

5-38

Power Loss Settings: L2

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Page

L2-05

Undervoltage detection level

PUV Det Level

Sets the DC bus undervoltage

(UV) detection level (DC bus voltage).

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

150 to

210

190VDC

No A A A 489H --

L2-11

Battery Voltage

Volt@batterydr

Sets the battery voltage.

0 to 400 0VDC

* 1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. The value for a 400 V class Inverter is the double.

No A A A 4CBH

5-68

User Parameter Tables

Stall Prevention: L3

Parameter Number

L3-01

L3-02

L3-05

L3-06

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Stall prevention selection during accel

StallP Accel Sel

0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.

With a too heavy load, the motor may stall.)

1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped when L3-02 level is exceeded.

Acceleration starts again when the current has fallen below the stall prevention level).

2: Intelligent acceleration mode

(Using the L3-02 level as a basis, acceleration is automatically adjusted. The set acceleration time is disreg-arded.)

0 to 2 1

Stall prevention level during accel

StallP Accel Lvl

Sets the stall prevention during acceleration operation current level as a percentage of Inverter rated current.

Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or 2.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary. Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.

0 to 200 150%

Stall prevention selection during running

StallP Run Sel

Selects the stall prevention during running.

0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)

1: Deceleration using deceleration time 1

(C1-02.)

2: Deceleration using deceleration time 2 (C1-04.)

0 to 2 1

Stall prevention level during running

StallP Run Level

Set the stall prevention during running operation current level as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.

Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.

30 to 200 150%

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

48FH

490H

493H

494H

Page

5-21

5-34

-32

Reference Detection: L4

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

L4-01

L4-02

Speed agreement detection level

Spd Agree Level

Speed agreement detection width

Spd Agree Width

Effective when "f out

/f set

agree 1",

"Frequency detection 1" or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function output.

Effective when "f ref

/f out

agree 1",

"f out

/f set

agree 1" or "Frequency detection 1" or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function output.

0.0 to

120.0

0.0 to

20.0

0.0 Hz

2.0 Hz

L4-03

Speed agreement detection level (+/-)

Spd Agree Lvl+-

Effective when "f out

/f set

agree 2",

"Frequency detection 3" or "Frequency detection 4" is set for a multi-function output.

-120.0 to

+120.0

0.0 Hz

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

499H

49AH

49BH

5-23

L4-04

Speed agreement detection width (+/-)

Spd Agree Wdth+-

Effective when "f ref

/f out

agree 2"

"f out

/f set

agree 2", "Frequency detection 3" or "Frequency detection 4" is set for a multi-function output.

0.0 to

20.0

2.0 Hz No A A A 49CH

5-23

Fault Restart: L5

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Number of auto restart attempts

L5-01

L5-02

Num of Restarts

Auto restart operation selection

Restart Sel

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Sets the number of auto restart attempts.

Automatically restarts after a fault The retry fault code are the followings

OV, UV1, GF, OC, OL2, OL3,

OL4, UL3, UL4, PF, LF, SE1,

SE2, SE3

Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.

0: No output (Fault contact is not activated.)

1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)

0 to 10

0 or 1

49EH

49FH

Page

5-71

User Parameter Tables

Torque Detection: L6

Parameter Number

L6-01

L6-02

L6-03

L6-04

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Torque detection selection 1

Torq Det 1 Sel

0: Torque detection disabled.

1: Car stuck detection only with speed agreement; operation continues (warning is output).

2: Car stuck detected continuously during operation; operation continues

(warning is output).

3: Car stuck detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection.

4: Car stuck detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection.

5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues (warning is output).

6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues

(warning is output).

7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection.

8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection.

0 to 8 4

Torque detection level 1

Torq Det 1 Lvl

Vector control: Motor rated torque is set as 100%.

V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.

0 to 300 150%

Torque detection time 1

Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time.

Torq Det 1 Time

Torque detection selection 2

0.0 to

10.0

0 to 8

0.1 s

Torq Det 2 Sel

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

4A1H

4A2H

4A3H

4A4H

Page

5-34

L6-05

Torque detection level 2

See L6-01 to L6-03 for a description.

Torq Det 2 Lvl

L6-06

Torque detection time 2

Torq Det 2 Time

0 to

300

0.0 to

10.0

150%

0.1 s

4A5H

4A6H

5-34

-34

Torque Limits: L7

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

L7-01

L7-02

L7-03

L7-04

L7-06

L7-07

Forward drive torque limit

Torq Limit Fwd

Reverse drive torque limit

Torq Limit Rev

Forward regenerative torque limit

Torq Lmt Fwd

Rgn

Reverse regenerative torque limit

Torq Lmt Rev

Rgn

Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.

Four individual regions can be set.

Revers e

Output torque

Positive torque

Regenerative state

Negative

No. of motor rotations

Forward

Torque limit time constant

Torque Limit

Time

Sets the torque limit integration time constant

Torque Limit

Operation during accel/decel

Torque Limit Sel

Sets the torque limit operation during acceleration and deceleration.

0: P-control (I control is added at constant speed operation)

1: I-control

Normally changing this setting is not necessary.

If the torque limitation accuracy during accel/decel. has preference, I control should be selected. This may result in an increased accel./decel. time and speed deviations from the reference value.

0 to

300

0 to

300

0 to

300

0 to

300

5 to

10000

0 or 1

300%*

200 ms

4A7H

4A8H

4A9H

4AAH

4ACH

4C9H

Page

5-37

5-38

Hardware Protection: L8

Parameter Number

L8-02

L8-03

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Overheat pre-alarm level

OH Pre-Alarm Lvl

Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm in

°C.

The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.

50 to 130 90

°C*

Operation selection after overheat prealarm

OH Pre-Alarm Sel

Sets the operation when an

Inverter overheat pre-alarm occurs.

0: Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time C1-02.

1: Coast to stop

2: Fast stop in fast-stop time

C1-09.

3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)

A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.

0 to 3 3

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

4AEH

4AFH

Page

5-40

User Parameter Tables

Parameter Number

L8-05

L8-07

L8-09

L8-10

L8-11

L8-12

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Input open-phase protection selection

Ph Loss In Sel

0: Disabled

1: Enabled (Detects power supply open-phase, power supply voltage imbalance or

DC bus electrostatic capacitor deterioration.)

Output open-phase protection selection

Ph Loss Out Sel

0: Disabled

1: Enabled, 1 Phase

Observatioin

2: Enabled, 2 and 3 Phase

Observatioin

An output open-phase is detected at less than 5% of

Inverter rated current.

When the applied motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, the detection may not work properly and should be disabled.

Ground fault detection selection

0:Disabled

1:Enabled

Ground Fault Sel

Cooling fan control selection

Fan On/Off Sel

Set the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan.

0: ON when Inverter is running only

1: ON whenever power is ON

2: When the temperature exceeds L8-21 setting.

0 or 1

0 or 2

0 or 1

0 or 2

Cooling fan control delay time

Fan Delay Time

Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the inverter STOP command is given. (Valid only if L8-10 = 0)

0 to 300 60 s

Ambient temperature

Ambient Temp

Sets the ambient temperature.

45 to 60 45

°C

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

4B1H

4B3H

4B5H

4B6H

4B7H

4B8H

5-40

5-41

5-42

L8-18

Soft CLA selection

Soft CLA Sel

0: Disable

1: Enable

0 or 1 1 No A A A 4BFH --

L8-20

Output phase loss detection time Sets the detection time of outout phase loss detection (LF.)

Pha loss det T

0.0 to

2.0

0.2sec

No A A A 4C0H

5-41

* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 3.7 kW is given.

-36

N: Special Adjustments

Automatic Frequency Regulator: N2

Parameter Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

N2-01

Speed feedback detection control

(AFR) gain

AFR Gain

Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain.

Normally, there is no need to change this setting.

If necessary, adjust this parameter as follows:

• If hunting occurs, increase the set value.

• If response is low, decrease the set value.

Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time, while checking the response.

0.00 to

10.00

N2-02

Speed feedback detection control

(AFR) time constant

AFR Time

Set the time constant 1 to decide the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control.

1.00

0 to 2000 50 ms

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

584H

585H

5-31

User Parameter Tables

Feed Forward: N5

User constants for the feed forward control are shown in the following table.

Name

Constant

Number

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

MEMO

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

BUS

Page

N5-01

N5-02

Feed forward control selection

Feedfoward Sel

Motor acceleration time

Motor Accel Time

Enables or disables the feed forward control.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Set the time required to accelerate the motor at the rated torque

100

) to the rated speed (Nr).

J: GO

/4, P: Motor rated output t a

⋅ [

⋅

100

[

] rpm

]

However,

100

= ------

⋅

P kW r

[ rpm

]

⋅

[

]

0 or 1

0.001 to

10.000

0.178 s

5B0H

5-31

5B1H

5-31

N5-03

Feed forward proportional gain

Feedfoward Gain

Sets the proportional gain for feed forward control.

Speed reference response will increase as the setting of

N5-03 is increased.

* The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity

0.00 to

100.00

1.00

No No No A 5B2H

5-31

Digital Operator/Monitor Parameters: o

Monitor Selections: o1

Parameter

Number

Name

Description

Setting

Range

Display o1-01 o1-02

Monitor selection Set the number of the 4rd. monitor item to be displayed in the

User Monitor Sel

Drive Mode. (U1-)

(On LED operator JVOP-161 only.)

Monitor selection after power up

Power-On Monitor

Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.

1: Frequency reference

2: Output frequency

3: Output current

4: The monitor item set for o1-01

4 to 99

1 to 4

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Yes

500H

501H

Page

5-57

-38

Parameter

Number

Name

Description

Display o1-03

Frequency units of reference setting and monitor

Display

Scaling

Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.

0: 0.01 Hz units

1: 0.01% units (Maximum output frequency is

100%)

2 to 39: rpm units (Set the motor poles.)

40 to 39999: User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.

Setting

Range

0 to

39999

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

0 No A A A 502H

5-57

Sets the value that is to be displayed at

100% excluding the decimal point.

Sets the number of decimal places.

o1-04 o1-05

LCD Contrast

Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set

12000

Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/f characteristics

Display Units

Set the setting unit for frequency reference-related parameters.

0: Hz

1: min

−1

LCD Display contrast adjustment

Sets the contrast on the optional

LCD operator

(JVOP-160).

1: light

3: normal

5: dark

0 or 1

0 to 5

Yes

503H

504H

5-57

5-58

Digital Operator/Monitor Functions: o2

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display o2-01 o2-02

LOCAL/REMOTE

Enables/Disables the Digital key enable/disable

Operator/Monitor Local/Remote key

0: Disabled

1: Enabled (Switches between

Local/Remote Key the Digital Operator/Monitor and the parameter settings b1-01, b1-02.)

STOP key during control circuit terminal operation

Oper Stop Key

Enables/Disables the Stop key in the run mode.

0: Disabled (When the run command is issued from an external terminal, the Stop key is disabled.)

1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)

Setting

Range

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

505H

506H

Page

5-58

User Parameter Tables

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page o2-03

User parameter initial value

User Defaults

Clears or stores user initial values.

0: Stores/not set

1: Begins storing (Records the set parameters as user initial values.)

2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)

When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values,

1110 will be set in A1-03.

0 to 2 0 No A A A 507H

5-58

o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 kVA selection

Inverter Model #

Frequency reference setting method selection

Operator M.O.P.

Do not set unless after replacing the control board. (Refer to

page

4-51

for the setting values).

When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator/Monitor frequency reference monitor, sets whether the Enter key is necessary or not.

0: Enter key needed

1: Enter key not needed

When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without

Enter key operation.

Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected

Oper

Detection

Sets the operation when the Digital Operator/Monitor is disconnected.

0: Operation continues even if the Digital Operator/Monitor is disconnected.

1: OPR is detected at Digital

Operator/Monitor disconnection. Inverter output is switched off, and the fault contact is operated.

Cumulative operation time setting

Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.

Elapsed Time Set

Cumulative operation time selection

Elapsed Time Run

0: Accumulated inverter power on time.

1: Accumulated inverter run time.

0 to FF

0 or 1

0 to

65535

0 or 1 o2-09

Initialize Mode

InitModeSet

2: Europe 2 o2-10 o2-12 o2-15

Fan operation time setting

Fan ON Time Set

Sets the initial value of the fan operation time.

The operation time is accumulated starting from this set value.

Fault trace initialize

Fault Trace Init

Number of Travels counter initialize

Initialize Sel

0: No initialisation

1: Initialize (= zero clear) after setting ”1“ o2-12 will be returned to ”0“

Operation counter initilalization

0: Number of travels counter is

kept

1: Number of travels counter

monitor clear

0 to

65535

0 or 1

0 hr

508H

509H

50AH

50BH

50CH

50DH

50EH

510H

513H

5-58

5-59

-40

Copy Function: o3

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display o3-01 o3-02

Copy function selection

Copy Function Sel

0: Normal operation

1: READ (Inverter to Operator)

2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)

3: Verify (compare)

Read permission selection 0: READ prohibited

Read

Allowable

1: READ permitted

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

0 to 3 0 No A A A 515H

5-59

0 or 1 0 No A A A 516H

5-59

Lift Function Parameters: S

S1 Brake Sequence

Parameter

Number

Name

Description

Display

S1-02

S1-03

DC injection braking current at start

DC Inj I @start

DC injection braking currnet at stop

DC Inj I @stop

DC injection braking time at start

Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.

S1-04

S1-05

S1-06

S1-07

DC Inj T@start

DC injection braking time at stop

DC Inj T@stop

Brake release delay time

Brake open delay

Brake close delay time

Brake CloseDelay

Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start in units of

1 second.

Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When the set value is 0,

DC injection braking at start is not performed.

Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of

1 second.

Used to prevent coasting after the stop command is input. When the set value is 0.00, DC injection braking at stop is not performed.

Sets the time delay from the brake open command to the start of acceleration.

This timer can be used to avoid running against the closed brake at start.

Sets the time delay from the internal brake close command until the brake control output is switched.

This timer can be used to avoid closing the brake when the motor is still turning.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0 to

100

0 to

100

0.00

10.00

0.00

10.00

0.00

10.00

0.00

S1-05

50%

0.30 s

0.60 s

0.20

0.10

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

681H

682H

18BH

18CH

685H

5-11

User Parameter Tables

Parameter

Number

Name

Description

Setting

Range

Display

S1-14

S1-15

S1-16

SE2 detection delay time

SE2 det T

Used to set the delay time for the detectio of a SE2 fault.

At the time S1-06 + S1-14 after the

Fwd/Rev command was given the output current is measured. If it is below 25% of the no-load current

(E2-03) setting a SE2 fault will be output.

0 to

S1-04 -

S1-06

SE3 detection delay time

SE3 det T

Used to set the delay time for the detection of a SE3 fault.

At the time S1-15 after the fwd/rev command was given, the inverterstarts to observe the output current continously. If it falls below 25% of the no-load current (E2-03) setting a SE3 will be output.

RUN delay time

Run Delay T

Sets the delay time from the Run signal input to the internal run enable.

0 to

5000

0.00

1.00

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

200ms

0.10sec

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

6A1H

6A2H

6A3H

5-39

5-11

S1-17

S1-18

S1-19

S1-20

S1-21

S1-22

DC injection current gain at regenerative operation

DC Inj gain@gen

DC injection current gain at motoring operation

DC Inj gain@mot

Used to set the DC injection gain when inveter is in the regerenative mode.

Used to set the DC injection gain when inveter is in the motoring mode.

0 to

400

0 to

400

Output contactor open delay time

Cont open delay

Sets the contactor control output delay time after stop.

0.00

1.00

Zero-servo gain Adjust the strength of the zeroservo lock.

When Closed Loop Vector control is selected, a position control loop

Zero Servo Gain is created at stop. Increasing the zero-servo gain increases the strength of the lock. Increasing it by too much will cause oscillation.

0 to 100

Zero-servo completion width

Zero Servo

Count

Sets the bandwidth of the Zero

Servo completion output.

Enabled when the “zero-servo completion (end)” is set for a multi-function output. The zeroservo completion signal is ON when the current position is within the range (the zero-servo position

+ zero-servo completion width.)

Set S1-21 to 4 times of the allowable displacement pulse amount at the PG.

Starting torque compensation increase time

Torque incr T

Sets the increase time for the analog input torque compensation signal. Sets the time the torque reference needs to reach 300% torque reference.

0 to

16383

0 to

5000

100%

20%

0.10sec

500ms

6A4H

6A5H

6A6H

6A7H

6A8H

6A9H

5-11

-42

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

S1-23

S1-24

S1-25

S1-26

S1-27

Torque compensation gain during lowering

TorqCompgain@low

Sets the torque compensation gain at lowering when the torque compensation at start function is used.

0.500

10.000

Torque compensation bias during raising

TorqComp-

Bias@ri

Sets the torque compensation bias at raising when the torque compensation at start function is used.

Torque compensation bias during lowering

TorqComp-

Bias@red

Sets the torque compensation bias at lowering when the torque compensation at start function is used.

Dwell speed reference

DWELL speed

-200.0

+200.0

-200.0

+200.0

Hold speed reference when the load is heavy.The frequency reference follows the C1-07 acceleration 4 setting time.

Acceleration time will be changed when the motor speed exceeds the

C1-11 setting frequency.

0.0

to 120.0

Door zone speed level

Door Zone Level

Sets the door zone speed level.

If the motor speed (in CLV and

OLV) or the output frequency (in

V/f control) falls below S1-27 and a multifunction output is set for the “Door zone” signal

(H2-=42), this output will be closed.

0.0

to 120.0

1.000

0.0%

0.0Hz

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

6AAH

6ABH

6ACH

6ADH

5-11

5-18

5-49

User Parameter Tables

S2 Slip Compensation

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

S2-01

Motor rated speed

Rated rpm

Description

Sets the motor rated speed.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

300 to

1800

S2-02

S2-03

S2-07

Slip compensation gain in motoring mode

SlipComp gainMot

Sets the slip compensation gain in motoring mode.

It can be used to improve the leveling accuracy.

Slip compensation gain in regenerative mode

Sets the slip compensation gain in regenerative mode.

It can be used to improve the leveling accuracy.

SlipComp gain-

Gen

Slip compensation delay time

SlipCompDelay

Sets the Slip compensation delay time.

0.0

2.5

0.0

2.5

0 to

10000

1380 rpm

0.7

1.0

200ms

Yes

6AEH

6AFH

6B0H

6B4H

5-32

S3 Special Sequence Functions

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display

S3-01

Short-floor funciton selection

Short floor sel

Enables or disables the short floor operation function

0:disabled

1:enabled

Setting

Range

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Page

0 No A A A 6BDH

5-16

-44

T: Motor Autotuning

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

T1-01

T1-02

T1-03

T1-04

T1-05

T1-06

T1-07

T1-08

T1-09

Autotuning mode selection

Tuning Mode Sel

Sets the autotuning mode.

0: Rotating autotuning

1: Non-rotating autotuning

2: Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only

Motor output power

Mtr Rated Power

Sets the output power of the motor in kilowatts.

Motor rated voltage

Rated Voltage

Motor rated current

Rated

Current

Sets the rated voltage of the motor.

Sets the rated current of the motor.

Motor base frequency

Rated Frequency

Sets the base frequency of the motor.

Number of motor poles

Sets the number of motor poles.

Number of Poles

Motor base speed Sets the base speed of the motor

Rated Speed in r/min.

Number of PG pulses

Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution.

PG Pulses/Rev

No load current

Sets the no load currnet of motor.

No load current

0 to 2

0.00 to

650.00

0 to

255.0

1.75 to

35.00

0 to

120.0

2 to 48 poles

0 to

24000

0 to

24000

0.0 to

13.99

3.70 kW

190.0 V

14.00 A

50.0 Hz

4 poles

1450 r/min

1024

E2-03

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

Yes Yes

No Yes

No No

Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

No Yes Yes

701H

702H

703H

704H

705H

706H

707H

708H

709H

Page

5-51

* 1. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. For V/f control a set value 2 is possible only.

* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)

* 3. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.

* 4. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)

User Parameter Tables

U: Monitor Parameters

Status Monitor Parameters: U1

Parameter

Number

Name

Display

Description

U1-01

Frequency reference Monitors/sets the frequency

Frequency Ref reference value.*

U1-02

Output frequency

Output Freq

Output current

Monitors the output frequency.*

U1-03

Output Current

Monitors the output current.

Output Signal Level at

Multi-Function Analog

Output (AO-option card)

10 V: Max. frequency

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

Min.

Unit

0.01

10 V: Max. frequency

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

0.01

10 V: Inverter rated output current

(0 to +10 V, absolute value output)

0.1 A A

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

A A

40H

41H

42H

U1-04

Control method

Control Method

Motor speed

U1-05

Motor Speed

U1-06

Output voltage

Output Voltage

U1-07

DC bus voltage

DC Bus Voltage

Output power

U1-08

Output kWatts

U1-09

Torque reference

Torque

Reference

Displays the current control method.

Monitors the detected motor speed.*

Monitors the output voltage reference value.

(Cannot be output.)

10 V: Max. frequency

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)

(0 to +10 V output)

Monitors the main DC bus voltage.

Monitors the output power

(internally detected value).

10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)

(0 to +10 V output)

10 V: Inverter capacity

(max. applicable motor capacity)

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

Monitors the internal torque reference value for open vector control.

10 V: Motor rated torque

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

0.01

0.1 V A

1 V

0.1 kW

0.1% No

43H

44H

45H

46H

47H

48H

* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Input terminal status

Shows input ON/OFF status.

U1-10

Input Term Sts

1: FWD command

(S1) is ON

1: REV command

(S2) is ON

1: Multi input 1

(S3) is ON

1: Multi input 2

(S4) is ON

1: Multi input 3

(S5) is ON

1: Multi input 4

(S6) is ON

1: Multi input 5

(S7) is ON

(Cannot be output.) A A A 49H

-46

Parameter Number

Name

Description

Display

U1-11

Output terminal status

Shows output ON/OFF status.

1: Multi-function contact output 1

(M1-M2) is ON

Output Term Sts

1: Multi-function contact output 2

(M3-M4) is ON

1: Multi-function contact output 3

(M5-M6) is ON

Not used

(Always 0).

1: Error output

(MA/MB-MC) is

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

(Cannot be output.) A A A 4AH

U1-12

Operation status Inverter operating status.

Int Ctl Sts 1

Run

1: Zero speed

1: Reverse

1: Reset signal

input

1: Speed agree

1: Inverter ready

(Cannot be output.)

1: Minor fault

1: Major fault

A A A 4BH

U1-13

Cumulative operation time

Elapsed Time

Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter.

The initial value and the operating time/power ON time selection can be set in o2-07 and o2-08.

(Cannot be output.)

U1-14

Software No.

(flash memory)

FLASH ID

U1-15

Terminal A1 input level

Term A1 Level

(Manufacturer’s ID number)

Monitors the input level of analog input A1. A value of 100% corresponds to 10V input.

(Cannot be output.)

10 V: 100%

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

U1-16

Terminal A2 input level

Term A2 Level

Monitors the input level of analog input A2. A value of 100% corresponds to 10V/20mA input.

U1-18

Motor secondary current (Iq)

Mot SEC Current

Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary current.

The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.

U1-19

Motor excitation current (Id)

Mot EXC current

Monitors the calculated value of the motor excitation current.

The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.

10 V/20mA: 100%

(0 to ±10 V possible)

10 V:Motor rated current)

(0 to ±10 V output)

10 V:Motor rated current)

(0 to ±10 V output)

1 hr

0.1% A

0.1% No

U1-20

Frequency reference after softstarter

SFS Output

Monitors the frequency reference after the soft starter.

This frequency value does not include compensations, such as slip compensation.

The unit is set in o1-03.

10 V: Max. frequency

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

0.01H

A 4CH

A 4DH

A 4EH

4FH

51H

52H

53H

User Parameter Tables

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

U1-21

ASR Input

U1-22

ASR output

U1-25

ASR input

ASR output

DI-16H2 input status

DI-16 Reference

Monitors the input to the speed control loop.

The maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.

Monitors the output from the speed control loop.

The maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.

10 V: Max. frequency

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

10 V:Max. frequency

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

Monitors the reference value from a DI-16H2 Digital Reference

Card.

The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on user constant F3-01.

(Cannot be output.)

U1-26

Output voltage reference (Vq)

Voltage Ref(Vq)

U1-27

Output voltage reference (Vd)

Voltage Ref(Vd)

U1-28

Software No.

(CPU)

CPU ID

Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control.

Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor excitation current control.

(Manufacturer’s CPU software

No.)

10 V: 200 VAC

(400 VAC)

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

10 V: 200 VAC

(400 VAC)

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

(Cannot be output.)

U1-32

ACR output of q axis

ACR(q)

Output

Monitors the current control output value for the motor secondary current.

10 V: 100%

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

U1-33

ACR output of d axis

ACR(d) axis

Monitors the current control output value for the motor excitation current.

10 V: 100%

(0 to ± 10 V possible)

U1-34

OPE fault parameter

Shows the first parameter number when an OPE fault is detected.

OPE Detected

(Cannot be output.)

U1-35

Zero sevo movement pulses

Zero Servo Pulse

Shows the number of PG pulses of the movement range when zero servo was activated. The shown value is the actual pulse numer times 4.

(Cannot be output.)

MEMOBUS communications error code

Shows MEMOBUS errors.

1: CRC error

1: Data length error

Not used

1: Parity error

U1-39 (Cannot be output.)

1: Overrun error

Transmit Err

1: Framing error

0.01% No

0.1 V No

0.1

54H

55H

58H

59H

5AH

5BH

5FH

60H

61H

62H

66H

1: Timeout

U1-40

Cooling fan operating time

FAN Elapsed

Time

Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan. The time can be set in

02-10.

(Cannot be output.)

1 hr

A A A 67H

-48

Parameter Number

U1-44

Name

Display

Description

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output

Min.

Unit

ASR output without filter

ASR Output w Fil

Monitors the output from the speed control loop (i.e., the primary filter input value). 100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.

10 V: Rated secondary current of motor

(-10 V to 10 V)

0.01% No

Control Methods MEMO-

BUS

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

No A 6BH

Feed forward control output

U1-45

FF Cout Output

Monitors the output from feed forward control. 100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.

10 V: Rated secondary current of motor

(-10 V to 10 V)

0.01% No No A 6CH

Slip compensation value

U1-50

Slip comp value

Monitors the slip compensation value.100% is displayed for rated slip

10 V: Rated slip of motor

( -10 V to 10 V)

0.01% A A A 71H

U1-51

Max Current during acceleration

Max Amp at accel

Monitors the maximum currnet during acceleration.

10 V: Rated current of motor

(0 V to 10 V)

0.1 A A

U1-52

Max Current during deceleration

Max Amp at decel

Monitors the maximum currnet during deceleration.

10 V: Rated current of motor

(0 V to 10 V)

0.1 A A

U1-53

Max Current during Top speed

Max Amp at top speed

Monitors the maximum currnet at top speed.

10 V: Rated current of motor

(0 V to 10 V)

0.1 A A

U1-54

Max Current during leveling speed

Max Amp at Vl sped

Monitors the maximum currnet at

Vl speed.

10 V: Rated current of motor

(0 V to 10 V)

0.1 A A

U1-55

Operation counter Monitors the lift operation

Operation Cnt coumter .

O2-15 can clear this counter.

(Cannot be output.) times A

72H

73H

74H

75H

76H

User Parameter Tables

Fault Trace: U2

Parameter Number

Name

Display

Description

Output Signal Level

During Multi-Function

Analog Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

MEMO-

BUS

U2-01

Current fault

Current Fault

U2-02

Last fault

Last Fault

The content of the current fault.

The error content of the last fault.

U2-03

Reference frequency at fault

The reference frequency when the last fault occurred.

Frequency Ref

U2-04

Output frequency at fault

Output Freq

U2-05

Output current at fault

Output

Current

The output frequency when the last fault occurred.

The output current when the last fault occurred.

U2-06

Motor speed at fault The motor speed when the last

Motor Speed fault occurred.

U2-07

Output voltage reference at fault

Output

Voltage

The output reference voltage when the last fault occurred.

(Cannot be output.)

U2-08

DC bus voltage at fault

DC Bus Voltage

The main current DC voltage when the last fault occurred.

U2-09

Output power at fault The output power when the last

Output kWatts fault occurred.

U2-10

Torque reference at fault

Torque

Reference

The reference torque when the last fault occurred. The motor rated torque corresponds to 100%.

U2-11

Input terminal status at fault

Input Term Sts

The input terminal status when the last fault occurred.

The format is the same as for U1-

10.

U2-12

Output terminal status at fault

Output Term Sts

U2-13

Operation status at fault

Inverter Status

The output terminal status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-11.

The operating status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.

U2-14

Cumulative operation time at fault

The operating time when the last fault occurred.

Elapsed Time

(Cannot be output.)

0.01

0.1 kW

1 hr

0.1 A A

0.1 V A

1 V A

0.1% No

80H

81H

82H

83H

84H

85H

86H

87H

88H

89H

8AH

8BH

8CH

8DH

The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.

-50

Fault History: U3

Parameter Number

Name

Display

U3-01

Last fault

Last Fault

Description

The error content of 1st last fault.

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog

Output

U3-02

Second last fault

Fault Message 2

U3-03

Third last fault

Fault Message 3

The error content of 2nd last fault.

The error content of 3rd last fault.

U3-04

Fourth last fault

Fault Message 4

The error content of 4th last fault.

U3-05

Cumulative operation time at fault The total operating time when the 1st previous fault occurred.

Elapsed Time 1

U3-06

Accumulated time of second fault

Elapsed Time 2

The total operating time when the 2nd previous fault occurred.

(Cannot be output.)

U3-07

Accumulated time of third fault

Elapsed Time 3

The total operating time when the 3rd previous fault occurred.

U3-08

Accumulated time of fourth/oldest fault

Elapsed Time 4

The total operating time when the 4th previous fault occurred.

Fifth last to tenth last fault

U3-09 –

U3-14

Fault Message 5 to 10

The error content of the 5th to 10th last fault

Min.

Unit

MEMOBUS

1 hr

–

90H

91H

92H

93H

94H

95H

96H

97H

Accumulated time of fifth to tenth fault

U3-15 –

U3-20

Elapsed Time 5 to 10

Total generating time when 5th ... 10th pevious fault occured

1hr

804

805H

806H

807H

808H

809H

806H

80FH

810H

811H

812H

813H

The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.

User Parameter Tables

Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)

Parameter

Number

Name Setting Range Unit

C3-01 Slip compensation gain

E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)

E1-09 Min. output frequency (FMIN)

E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)

S1-01 O speed level

S1-04 DC injection braking time at stop

0.0 to 2.5

0.0 to 255.0

(0.0 to 510.0)

0.0 to 120.0

0.0 to 255.0

(0.0 to 510.0)

0.0 to 10.0

0.00 to 10.00

0.1 V

0.1 Hz

0.1 V

0.1 Hz

0.01 sec

* 1. The settings are 0.05 (Closed Loop Vector) / 2.00 (Open Loop vector) for inverters of 55kW or larger.

* 2. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.

* 3. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.

V/f Control

A1-02=0

Factory Setting

Open

Loop

Vector

A1-02=2

Closed

Loop

Vector

A1-02=3

1.0

20.0

*2*3

0.5

12.5

*2*3

1.2

0.50

12.5

0.3

2.0

0.5

0.30

0.0

0.1

0.00

-52

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 45 kW*

Para meter

Number

Unit

Factory Setting Open

Loop

Vector

Control

Closed

Loop

Vector

Control

E1-03

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

E1-04 Hz 50.0

60.0

72.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

90.0

120.0 180.0

50.0

E1-05

V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 190.0 190.0 190.0

E1-06 Hz 50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

E1-07

E1-08

2.5

14.0

3.0

14.0

3.0

14.0

3.0

14.0

25.0

35.0

25.0

50.0

30.0

35.0

30.0

50.0

2.5

18.0

2.5

23.0

3.0

18.0

3.0

23.0

3.0

14.0

3.0

14.0

3.0

14.0

3.0

18.6

3.0

12.5

0.0

E1-09 Hz 1.3

E1-10

V 7.0

1.5

7.0

1.5

7.0

1.5

7.0

1.3

6.0

1.3

7.0

1.5

6.0

1.5

7.0

1.3

9.0

1.3

11.0

1.5

9.0

1.5

13.0

1.5

7.0

1.5

7.0

1.5

7.0

0.5

9.7

0.3

2.5

0.0

* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.

200 V Class Inverters of 55 kW

Para meter

Number

Unit

Factory Setting Open

Loop

Vector

Control

Closed

Loop

Vector

Control

E1-03

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

E1-04 Hz 50.0

60.0

72.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

90.0

120.0 180.0

50.0

E1-05

V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 190.0 190.0 190.0

E1-06 Hz 50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

E1-07

E1-08

2.5

12.0

3.0

12.0

3.0

12.0

3.0

12.0

25.0

35.0

25.0

50.0

30.0

35.0

30.0

50.0

2.5

15.0

2.5

20.0

3.0

15.0

3.0

20.0

3.0

12.0

3.0

12.0

3.0

12.0

3.0

16.0

3.0

12.5

0.0

E1-09 Hz 1.3

E1-10

V 6.0

1.5

6.0

1.5

6.0

1.5

6.0

1.3

5.0

1.3

6.0

1.5

5.0

1.5

6.0

1.3

7.0

1.3

9.0

1.5

7.0

1.5

11.0

1.5

6.0

1.5

6.0

1.5

6.0

0.5

8.3

0.3

2.5

0.0

* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.

User Parameter Tables

Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)

200 V Class Inverters

Parameter

Number

Name Unit

Factory Setting

o2-04

Inverter Capacity kVA selection

C6-02 Carrier frequency kW 3.7

E2-01

(E4-01)

E2-02

(E4-02)

E2-03

(E4-03)

E2-05

(E4-05)

E2-06

(E4-06)

Motor rated current

Motor rated slip

Motor no-load current

Motor line-to-line resistance

Motor leak inductance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

°C

2.73

4.50

5.5

7.5

14.00

19.60

26.60

18.5

0.771

0.399

0.288

0.230

0.138

0.101

0.079

19.6

112

1.50

5.10

18.2

172

1.30

8.00

15.5

262

39.7

1.70

11.2

19.5

245

53.0

1.60

15.2

17.2

272

65.8

1.67

15.7

20.1

505

77.2

1.70

18.5

19.5

538

Parameter

Number

Name Unit

Factory Setting

o2-04

Inverter Capacity kVA selection

C6-02 Carrier frequency kW 30

E2-01

(E4-01)

E2-02

(E4-02)

E2-03

(E4-03)

E2-05

(E4-05)

E2-06

(E4-06)

Motor rated current

Motor rated slip

Motor no-load current

Motor line-to-line resistance

Motor leak inductance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

°C

105.0

131.0

160.0

190.0

1.80

21.9

1.43

45.6

0.064

0.039

0.030

0.022

20.8

699

1.33

38.2

18.8

823

1.60

44.0

20.2

852

20.5

960

-54

400 V Class Inverters

Parameter

Number

Name Unit

Factory Setting

o2-04

Inverter Capacity kVA selection

C6-02 Carrier frequency kW 3.7

E2-01

(E4-01)

E2-02

(E4-02)

E2-03

(E4-03)

E2-05

(E4-05)

E2-06

(E4-06)

Motor rated current

Motor rated slip

Motor no-load current

Motor line-to-line resistance

Motor leak inductance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

°C

7.00

2.70

2.30

4.0

7.00

2.70

2.30

5.5

9.80

1.50

2.60

7.5

13.30

1.30

4.00

19.9

1.70

5.6

3.333

1.595

1.152

0.922

0.550

19.3

130

19.3

130

18.2

193

15.5

263

19.6

385

26.5

1.60

7.6

17.2

440

Parameter

Number

Name Unit

Factory Setting

o2-04

Inverter Capacity kVA selection

C6-02 Carrier frequency kW 18.5

E2-01

(E4-01)

E2-02

(E4-02)

E2-03

(E4-03)

E2-05

(E4-05)

E2-06

(E4-06)

Motor rated current

Motor rated slip

Motor no-load current

Motor line-to-line resistance

Motor leak inductance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

°C

32.9

1.67

7.8

95.0

1.46

24.0

0.403

0.316

0.269

0.155

0.122

0.088

20.1

508

38.6

1.70

9.2

23.5

586

52.3

1.80

10.9

20.7

750

65.6

1.33

19.1

18.8

925

79.7

1.60

22.0

19.9

1125

20.0

1260

Parameter Settings by

Function

Carrier Frequency Derating and Current Limitation.5-2

Control Sequence ....................................................5-4

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ......5-17

Adjusting Analog Input Signals ..............................5-22

Speed Detection and Speed Limitation .................5-23

Improving the Operation Performance...................5-26

Protective Functions ..............................................5-34

Inverter Protection .................................................5-40

Input Terminal Functions .......................................5-43

Output Terminal Functions ....................................5-47

Motor and V/f Pattern Setup ..................................5-50

Digital Operator/Monitor Functions ........................5-57

PG Option Cards ...................................................5-65

Battery Operation...................................................5-68

Automatic Fault Restart .........................................5-71

-2

Carrier Frequency Derating and

Current Limitation

Carrier Frequency Setting

The carrier frequency selection has a direct influence on the motor noise. The higher the carrier frequency the lower is the motor noise. On the other hand the overload capability of the inverter reduces with a higher carrier frequency. Both have to be considered when the setting is changed. Read the following for details.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

C6-02

Name

Carrier frequency selection

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

Carrier Frequency Selection

The factory setting is 8 kHz for units from 3.7 to 22 kW and 5 kHz for units from 30 to 55 kW. Usually the value has not to be changed. However, if it necessary to change it, observe the following precautions:

•

If speed and torque vary at low speeds: Lower the carrier frequency.

If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Lower the carrier frequency.

•

If leakage current from the Inverter too is large: Lower the carrier frequency.

If metallic noise from the motor is large: Increase the carrier frequency.

Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Capability

The inverter overload capability depends on the carrier frequency setting. The overload capability is 150% of the inverter rated current for 30 sec. After that an inverter overload fault (OL2) is shown.

If the carrier frequency is increased, a derating for the continuous output current like shown in

Fig 5.30

must be considered. The overload capability (OL2 Level) does not change. It will be 150% of the derated current for 30 sec.

Output current (%)

100% Rated Current

3 minutes 50% ED

125%

200V Class 22kW or less

400V Class 22kW or less

100%

75%

200V Class 30 to 55kW

400V Class 30 to 55kW

Carrier frequency

2 5 8 10 15 (kHz)

Fig 5.30 Current Derating depending on the carrier frequency

Carrier Frequency Derating and Current Limitation

Current limitation level at low speeds

Varispeed L7 limits the output current at low frequencies. This current limitation does not change with the carrier frequency selection. The current limitation in the low frequency is as follows.

150%

140%

130%

120%

110%

200V Class 15kW

400V Class 30kW

200V Class 3.7, 18, 30kW

400V Class 18, 22kW

200V Class 5.5kW

400V Class 3.7, 5.5, 7.5, 11, 55kW

200V Class11kW

200V Class 7.5, 22 , 37, 45, 55kW

400V Class 4.0, 15, 37, 45kW

1.5Hz

Output

Frequency

3Hz 4.5Hz

6Hz

Fig 5.31 Low frequency current limitation

IMPORTANT

• If the torque at low frequencies is too low, check whether the current runs into the limitation explained above. If so, check the motor data settings (E2-

) and the V/f pattern (E1-

• If the current still runs into the limit it might be necessary to install a one size bigger inverter.

• When selecting an inverter please consider the low frequency current limit as described above and select an inverter with an appropriate current margin.

Control Sequence

-4

Up and Down Commands

Travel start in Up or Down direction

UP and Down commands are the travel direction information.

To start in the elevator in Up or Down direction the following conditions have to be fulfilled:

•

At least one speed reference must be selected.

•

The hardware base block signal must be set (not base block condition).

When a digital input is set as contactor confirmation input, the contactor confirmation signal must be present before the travel starts.

To start to the UP direction the UP direction. To start in Down direction the Down signal must be set.

Inverter ready

Speed

Selection

UP or Down

Contactor

Control

Travel stop

The inverter can be stopped as follows:

•

The direction command (UP or Down) signal is removed.

•

The speed reference selection signal is removed.

Up / Down Command Source Selection

The input source for the Up and Down signal can be selected in parameter b1-02.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

b1-02

Name

RUN command source selection

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

1 No

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

Up/Down Commands Using the Digital Operator (b1-02=0)

When b1-02 is set to 0 the Up/Down command must be input using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,

and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator refer to

page 3-1, Digital Monitor/ Operator and Modes

This operation can be used for test purposes only.

Up/Down Commands Using Control Circuit Terminals (b1-02=1, factory setting)

When b1-02 is set to 1 the Up/Down command is input at the control circuit terminals S1 and S2. This is the factory setting and the most common configuration.

Up/Down Commands Using Memobus Communications (b1-02=2)

When b1-02 is set to 2 the Up/Down command can be set using Memobus communications.

Up/Down Commands Using an Input Option Card (b1-02=3)

When b1-02 is set to 2 the Up/Down command can be set using an input option card, for example a field bus communications card.

Control Sequence

Speed Reference Source Selection

The speed reference source can be selected using parameter b1-01.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

b1-01

Name

Frequency reference source selection

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0 No

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

Input the Speed Reference from the Digital Inputs (b1-01=0)

When b1-01 is set to 0 the speed reference can be selected from preset speeds using the digital inputs of the

inverter. Refer to

page 5-6, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs

for details.

Input the Speed Reference Using a Voltage Signal (b1-01=1)

When b1-01 is set to 1 and H3-15 (Input function for A1) is set to 0 (Frequency reference) the speed reference can be input by the terminal A1 as a 0 to +10V signal. If an analog option card AI-14B is installed, the A1 signal is replaced by the Channel 1 input of the AI card.

The analog reference signal can be used as well as 1st speed if multispeed operation is selected (Refer to

page

5-6, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs

for details)

Input the Speed Reference Using Memobus Communications (b1-01=2)

When b1-01 is set to 2 the speed reference can be input using Memobus communications.

Input the Speed Reference Using an Input Option Card (b1-01=3)

When b1-01 is set to 2 the speed reference can be input using an input option card, for example a field bus communications card.

Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs

If the digital inputs are used for speed selection, the speed selection method and the speed priority depends on the setting of parameter d1-18.

Parameter

No.

d1-18

Name

Speed Priority Selection

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

Multi-Step Speed Operation (Binary Input) (d1-18=0)

Maximum 8 preset speed steps can be selected using 3 binary coded digital inputs. The inverter is started using the Up/Down command. It stops when the Up/Down command is removed.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

d1-01 to d1-08

Name

Multi-Step speed 1 to 8 reference value

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0.00 Hz Yes

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Multi-function Digital Input Settings (H1-01 to H1-05) (Example)

Terminal

Parameter

Number

H1-02

H1-03

H1-04

Set Value

Multi-step speed command 1

Multi-step speed command 2

Multi-step speed command 3

Details

Speed Selection Table

The following table shows the combinations of the digital input and the according speed.

If b1-02 is set to “1”, speed 1 is input as analog reference at terminal A1 or Channel CH1 of an analog input option card AI-14B if it is installed.

If an AI-14B option card is used and the function for channel 2 and 3 is set for “Auxiliary Frequency 2”

(H3-05/09=2) and “Auxiliary Frequency 3” (H3-05/09=3) the speeds 2 and 3 are set at the CH2 and CH3 input of the option card.l

Speed

Multi-step Speed

Command 1

Multi-step Speed

Command 2

Multi-step Speed

Command 3

OFF

Selected Frequency

Frequency reference 1 d1-01 or A1/AI-14B CH1

Frequency reference 2 d1-02 or AI-14B CH2

Frequency reference 3 d1-03 or AI-14B CH3

Frequency reference 4 d1-04

Frequency reference 5 d1-05

Frequency reference 6 d1-06

Frequency reference 7 d1-07

Frequency reference 8 d1-08

Control Sequence

Separate Speed Selection Inputs, High Speed Has Priority (d1-18=1)

With this setting 6 different speeds can be set and selected using four digital inputs.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

Name d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-17

Nominal Speed

Intermediate Speed 1

Intermediate Speed 2

Intermediate Speed 3

Releveling Speed

Leveling Speed

* This speed can be selected by a combination of two inputs

50.00 Hz

0.00 Hz

4.00 Hz

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Yes

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

Digital Input

Setting (H1-01 to

H1-05)

Digital Input Factory Settings

Terminal

Parameter

Number

H1-01

H1-02

H1-03

H1-04

Set Value

Details

Nominal speed selection (d1-09)

Inspection speed selection (d1-14)

Intermediate speed selection (d1-10)

Leveling speed selection (d1-17)

Higher Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected (H1-=83)

If d1-18 is set to 1 and one multi-function digital input is set for the leveling speed (H1-=83) after removing the selected speed signal the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17). The selected speed must be different from leveling speed and inspection speed. The higher speed has priority over the leveling speed, i.e.

as long as a higher speed is selected the leveling signal is disregarded (see the fig. below)

The inverter stops when the leveling signal or the Up/Down signal is removed.

DC Injection/ zero servo

Speed

Hardware BB

Up/Donw

Leveling speed

Selected speed

No effect

Input is set

The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.

Terminal function

Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)

Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)

Releveling speed command (H1-=82)

Leveling speed command (H1-=83)

Nominal

Speed d1-09

Intermed.

Speed 1 d1-10

Intermed.

Speed 2 d1-11

Intermed.

Speed 3 d1-12

0 1 0

Relevel.

Speed d1-13

Leveling

Speed d1-17

* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, X = no meaning

0Hz

Higher Speed Priority is Selected and a Leveling Speed Input is Not Selected (H1-K83)

When the leveling speed command is not selected for any digital input, the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17) when the selected speed signal is removed. The selected speed must be different from leveling and inspection speed.

The inverter stops when the direction signal Up/Down is removed.

When no speed selection input is enabled, leveling speed is the speed reference.

DC Injection/ zero servo

Speed

Hardware BB

Up/Down

Selected speed

The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.

Terminal function

Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)

Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)

Releveling speed command (H1-=82)

Leveling speed command (H1-=83)

Nominal

Speed d1-09

N/A

Intermed.

Speed 1 d1-10

Intermed.

Speed 2 d1-11

N/A

Intermed.

Speed 3 d1-12

N/A

Relevel.

Speed d1-13

N/A

Leveling

Speed d1-17

N/A

* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, N/A = not available

To make the inverter stop must be remove the direction signal (UP or DOWN signal).

Separate Speed Selection Inputs, Leveling Speed Has Priority (d1-18=2)

The related parameters and the digital input pre-settings are the same as for the High Speed Priority setting

(d1-18=1).

Leveling Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected (H1-=83)

If d1-18 is set to “2” and one multi-function digital input is set for the leveling speed (H1-=83) the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17) as soon as the leveling speed selection input is activated. The leveling signal has priority over the selected speed, i.e. the selected speed is disregarded. The selected speed must be different from leveling speed and inspection speed.

The inverter stops when the leveling speed command is removed.

Speed

Hardware BB

Up/Down

Leveling speed

Selected speed

DC Injection/ zero servo

Leveling speed has priority

Control Sequence

The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.

Terminal function

Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)

Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)

Releveling speed command (H1-=82)

Leveling speed command (H1-=83)

Nominal

Speed d1-09

Intermed.

Speed 1 d1-10

Intermed.

Speed 2 d1-11

Intermed.

Speed 3 d1-12

0 1 0

Relevel.

Speed d1-13

Leveling

Speed d1-17

* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, X = no meaning

0Hz

Leveling Speed Priority is Selected and a Nominal Speed Input is Not Selected (H1-K80)

If d1-18 is set to “2” and no digital input is set for the nominal speed at no speed selection input the speed reference is nominal speed (d1-09). When the leveling speed signal is set, the inverter starts to decelerate to the leveling speed. The leveling speed signal has priority over all other speed signals, i.e. the intermediate speed 1 and 2 and the releveling signals are disregarded when leveling speed is selected.

The inverter can be stopped by removing the leveling speed signal or the Up/Down command.

CAUTION: When the speed selection wires are broken, the nominal speed will be selected instead of stop.

DC Injection/ zero servo

Speed

Hardware BB

Up/Down

Leveling speed

The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.

Terminal function

Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)

Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)

Releveling speed command (H1-=82)

Leveling speed command (H1-=83)

Nominal

Speed d1-09

N/A

Intermed.

Speed 1 d1-10

N/A

Intermed.

Speed 2 d1-11

N/A

Intermed.

Speed 3 d1-12

N/A

Relevel.

Speed d1-13

N/A

Leveling

Speed d1-17

N/A

* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, N/A = not available, X = no meaning

The intermediate speed 2 can not be selected using this configuration.

Emergency Stop

If a digital input terminal (H1-) is set to 15 or 17 (emergency stop), this input can be used to fast stop the inverter in the case of emergency. In this case the emergency stop deceleration time set in C1-09 is used. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 17.

After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.

Related parameters

Parameter

No.

C1-09 Emergency stop time

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

1.50 s No

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set

Value

Emergency Stop, NO contact

Emergency Stop, NC contact

Function

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes Yes Yes

Inspection RUN

A digital input can be used to activate the inspection run. Therefore a inspection speed must be set and one digital input must be set for “Inspection Run Selection” (H1-=84).

Related parameters

Parameter

No.

d1-14 Inspection Speed

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

25.00 Hz No

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set

Value

84 Inspection Run Selection

Function

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes Yes Yes

Control Sequence

The inspection run command must be set before setting the Up/Down signal. During start of the inspection

RUN the normal brake sequence is used and the inverter accelerates to the inspection speed (d1-14).

To stop the inverter, the Inspection Run command or the Up/Down command must be removed. In this case:

•

The inverter output is cut by baseblock immediately

•

The brake open signal is removed immediately

The contactor control output is removed immediately

The falling edge of the inspection RUN command or UP/DOWN commands triggers the contactor open command, the motor brake close command and the base block.

Inspection RUN

(Stop with Up/Down signal remove)

Inspection RUN

(Stop with Inspection Run signal remove)

DC Injection/ zero servo

Speed

Hardware BB

Up/Down (D/I)

Inspection RUN

Base block

MC closed (D/O)

Brake opened (D/O)

Speed

Hardware BB

Up/Down (D/I)

Inspection RUN

Base block

MC closed (D/O)

Brake opened (D/O) 5

Brake Sequence

The L7 supports two types of brake sequences, one with torque compensation at start using an analog input value and one without torque compensation at start.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

S1-17

S1-18

S1-19

S1-20

S1-21

S1-22

S1-23

S1-24

S1-25

H3-15

S1-02

S1-03

S1-04

S1-05

S1-06

S1-07

S1-16

Name

Terminal A1 function selection

DC injection braking current at start

DC injection braking current at sop

DC injection braking time at start

DC injection braking time at stop

Brake open delay time

Brake close delay time

Run delay time

DC injection current gain at regeneration

DC injection current gain at motoring

Output contactor open delay time

Zero-servo gain

Zero-servo completion width

Starting torque compensation increase time

Torque compensation gain in Down direction

Torque compensation bias in Up direction

Torque compensation bias in Down direction

Factory setting

100%

20%

0.10 sec

500 ms

1.0

0.0%

50%

0.30 sec

0.60 sec

0.20 sec

0.10 sec

Change during operation

V/f

Control Method

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

No No A

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value Function

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

80 to 83 Speed selection inputs (refer to

page 5-6, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs

)

Yes Yes Yes

86 Contactor closed answer back signal Yes Yes Yes

Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Set Value

Brake release command

Output contactor close command

Function

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes Yes Yes

Brake Sequence without torque compensation at start

To use the brake sequence without torque compensation at start,

•

the Terminal A1 function must be set to 0 (H3-15 = 0, speed reference input) the AI-14B Ch2 and Ch3 input functions must be set other than 14.(H3-05/09

≠ 14, torque reference not selected)

The figure below shows the timing chart for this brake sequence.

S1-16

DCInjection zero servo

S1-04

DCInjection zero servo

S1-05

Selected Speed

S1-06

Leveling

Speed

S1-07

Speed

S1-19

Up/Donw D/I

Inverter Hardware BB (D/I)

Contactor confirmation D/I

Leveling sped selection D/I

Selected speed (D/I)

Contactor Control D/O

Internal Run

Brake Control (D/O) stop t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8

Fig 5.32 Timing chart of Brake sequence without torque compensation at start t9 t10

Control Sequence

The timing chart above is divided in time zones. The following table explains the sequence in each time zone.

Timing t0-t1 t1-t2 t2-t3 t3-t4 t4-t5 t5-t6 t6-t7 t7-t8 t8-t9 t9-t10

Description

The inverter gets the direction signal (UP/DOWN)

The inverter gets the hardware base block disable signal (Not BB condition).

The inverter receives the speed reference signal.

The inverter sets the contactor closed signal.

The inverter waits for the contactor confirmation signal. If no digital input is set for “Contactor conformation signal”, the sequence is proceeded after exceeding the operation start delay time (S1-16).

Inverter will activate the output after passing the “RUN Delay Time” (S1-16).

DC Injection/zero servo or zero speed operation is started.

After passing the “Brake Open delay time” (S1-06), the inverter starts opening the brake.

The inverter keeps DC injection/zero servo or zero speed operation until

* the time S1-04 – S1-06 has exceeded if S1-06 < S1-04

* the time S1-06 has exceeded if S1-06 > S1-04 (try avoid this setting since the inverter could run against the brake)

The inverter starts to accelerate.

The inverter speed reaches the selected speed.

The speed is selection is changed to the leveling speed, the inverter starts to decelerate.

After reaching the leveling speed the inverter keeps operating at this speed.

The leveling signal is removed, the inverter ramps to stop.

The inverter reaches the zero speed.

The inverter starts DC injection/zero servo for the time set in S1-05.

After passing “Brake Close Delay Time” (S1-07), the inverter activates the brake close command.

The inverter continues DC Injection/zero speed or zero speed operation until S1-06 – S1-07 has time passed. Remove the direction signal.

The inverter shuts down the output voltage and the hardware base block signal must be set.

After the “Output contactor open delay time“(S1-19) has passed, the inverter releases the output contactor control signal.

Brake Sequence with torque compensation at start

This sequence works in Closed Loop Vector control only. To use the brake sequence with torque compensation at start,

•

the A1 function must be selected for “Torque compensation” (H3-15=1) or

•

one of the input channels Ch2 or Ch3 of the optional analog input card AI-14B must be set to “Torque

Compensation” (H3-05,H3-09=14).

The figure below shows the timing chart for this brake sequence.

Zero Speed

Control

S1-04

Zero Speed

Control

S1-05

S1-16 vn vl

S1-19 speed torque comp level at start

300%torque

S1-07

Clear the torque comp

Torque comp increase time

S1-22

Up/Donw D/I

Inverter Hardware BB (D/I)

Contactor confirmation D/I

Leveling speed selection D/I

Selected speed (D/I)

Contactor Control D/O

Internal Run

Brake Control (D/O) stop t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8

Fig 5.33 Timing chart of Brake sequence with torque compensation at start t9 t10

The timing chart above is divided in time zones. The following table explains the sequence in each time zone

Timing t0-t1 t1-t2 t2-t3 t3-t4 t4-t5 t5-t6 t6-t7 t7-t8

Description

The inverter gets the direction signal (UP/DOWN)

The inverter gets the hardware base block signal disable signal (Not BB condition).

The inverter receives the speed reference signal.

The inverter sets the contactor closed signal.

The Inverter will activate the output.

The DC Injection/zero servo or zero speed operation is started.

The analog torque compensation value is latched and start producing the torque compensation value from Zero based on the S1-22 (“Starting torque compensation increase time”.

After reaching torque comp level at start, the inverter sets the brake open and holds the torque compensation value until stop.

After passing zero speed operation time set in S1-04, the inverter starts accelerating.

The Dwell at start function can be activated.

The inverter starts to accelerate.

The inverter speed reaches the selected speed.

When the leveling speed is selected, the inverter starts to decelerate.

The inverter keeps operating at the leveling speed.

The leveling signal is removed, the inverter ramps to stop.

The inverter reaches the zero speed.

The inverter keeps zero speed control.

After passing “Brake Close Delay Time(S1-07)”, the inverter sets the brake close.

Control Sequence

Timing t8-t9 t9-t10

Description

The inverter continues zero speed operation until the time S1-06 – S1-07 time be passed.

Remove the direction signal.

The inverter shuts down the output voltage and the hardware base block signal must be set.

After the “Output contactor open delay time” (S1-19), the inverter releases the output contactor control signal.

Torque compensation at start

If a load measuring device is installed in the elevator, in Closed Loop Vector mode an analog input can be used to give a torque compensation value to the inverter.

The adjusted torque compensation value is latched when the direction command is given. At start it is increased from zero to the latched value using the torque increase time set in parameter S1-22. The torque compensation value is kept during the whole ride and is cleared when the direction command is removed.

The torque compensation function can be adjusted using the parameters shown in the block diagram below.

Adjust the parameter so that the torque compensation value is zero when the elevator is balanced.

Torque compensation bias during raising

S1-24 terminal A1

H3-15=1

H3-16

+ +

UP direction torque compensation

Torque compensation

H3-17

0 10v

S1-23

Torque compensation gain during lowering

S1-25

DOWN direction

Torque compensation bias during lowering

Short Floor Operation

Related parameters

Parameter

No.

S3-01 Short floor operation

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0 No

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Principle

The short floor operation is activated when the leveling signal is set before the nominal speed was reached.

The inverter calculates the distance for deceleration from nominal speed to 0.4 x the nominal speed, which is equal to the area S in the figure below.

Speed speed

S eed x 0.4

speed t

There are two ways:

•

If the leveling speed is set when 40% of the nominal speed was reached already, the inverter keeps the reached speed until the distance equal to area S is reached. After that it decelerates to leveling speed.

•

If the leveling signal is set before 40% of the nominal speed was reached, the inverter accelerates to 40% of the nominal speed and keeps it until the distance is equal to area S is reached. After that it decelerates to leveling speed.

Speed

0% Nominal speed

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times

The acceleration time indicates the time to increase the speed from 0% to 100% of the maximum speed set in

E1-04. The deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the speed from 100% to 0% of E1-04.

Four separate acceleration and deceleration times can be set. It can be switched over between them

•

using digital input signals

•

using the automatic accel./decel. time switch over function with a changeable switching speed level

The display unit and the setting range for the times can be selected between 0.0 sec. or 0.00sec.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

C1-01

C1-02

C1-03

C1-04

C1-05

C1-06

C1-07

C1-08

C1-10

C1-11

S1-26

Name

Acceleration time 1

Deceleration time 1

Acceleration time 2

Deceleration time 2

Acceleration time 3

Deceleration time 3

Acceleration time 4

Deceleration time 4

Acceleration/deceleration time setting unit

Deceleration time switching frequency

Dwell at start speed reference

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set

Value

7 Acceleration/Deceleration switch over 1

1A Acceleration/Deceleration switch over 2

Function

Factory

Setting

1.5 sec

0.0 Hz

Change during

Operation

Yes

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes Yes Yes

Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units

Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. The factory setting is 1.

Set value

Details

The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 6000.0 in units of 0.01 s.

The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.1 s.

Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal

Commands

When two digital input terminals are set for “Accel./Decel. time switch over 1 and 2” (H1-=7 and 1A), the acceleration/deceleration times can be switched over even during operation by combining the ON/OFF status of the terminals.

The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.

Acceleration/Deceleration

Time Selection 1 Terminal

OFF

Acceleration/Deceleration

Time Selection 2 Terminal

OFF

Acceleration Time

C1-01

C1-03

C1-05

C1-07

Deceleration Time

C1-02

C1-04

C1-06

C1-08

Automatic Deceleration Time Switch Over Using a Speed Level

The deceleration times C1-02 and C1-08 can be switched over automatically at a certain speed which can be set in parameter C1-11.

Fig 5.34

shows the working principle of the function.

Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.

Output

Frequency

Decel. time

Switching Freq.

C1-11

C1-01 C1-02

When output frequency

≥ C1-11the deceleration time 1 (C1-02) is used.

When output frequency < C1-11the deceleration time 4 (C1-08) is used.

C1-08

Fig 5.34 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency

Dwell at Start Function

This function can be used to have a low acceleration at start. The parameter S1-26 must be set to a certain speed level (dwell speed) to activate the function.

When the inverter starts, the inverter accelerates to the S1-26 speed level using the acceleration time C1-07.

Once the motor speed exceeds the S1-26, the inverter will use the original acceleration time.

Internal RUN

C1-07

S1-26

Soft Starter

Motor speed

Brake release

Fig 5.35 Dwell at start function

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

Acceleration and S-curve Settings

Five different S-curve times are used to reduce the jerk when the speed changes.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

Name

C2-01

C2-02

C2-03

C2-04

C2-05

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end

S-curve characteristic time below leveling

Fig 5.36

shows the influence of the different S-curve times.

Factory

Setting

0.5 s

Change during

Operation

C2-02

C2-03

V/f

Control Methods

V/f with

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

C2-04

C2-05

C2-01

Leveling Speed

Fig 5.36 S-curve settings

Output Speed Hold (Dwell Function)

The dwell function holds the speed temporarily.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04

Dwell frequency at start

Dwell time at start

Dwell frequency at stop

Dwell time at stop

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0.0 Hz

0.0 s

0.0 Hz

0.0 s

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Applying an Output Speed Dwell

The dwell function at start is applied when the speed level set in parameter b6-01 is reached and is kept for the time set in parameter b6-02. The dwell function at stop is applied when the speed reaches the level set in parameter b6-03 and is kept for the time set in parameter b6-04. The setting is shown in

Fig 5.37

Run command

Output frequency

OFF b6-01 b6-03

Time b6-02 b6-04

Fig 5.37 Output Frequency Dwell Settings

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

Stall Prevention During Acceleration

The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if the load is too heavy.

If L3-01 is set to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current reaches 85% of the set value in L3-02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, the acceleration will stop.

If L3-01 is set to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor accelerates so that the current is held at the level set in

L3-02. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

L3-01

L3-02

Name

Stall prevention selection during acceleration

Stall prevention level during acceleration

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

150%*

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A No

Time Chart

The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.

Output current

Stall level during acceleration

L3-02

85% of L3-02

Time

Output frequency

*1.

*2.

* 1. The acceleration rate is lowered.

* 2. The acceleration is stopped to reduce the output current.

Fig 5.38 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration

Time

Setting Precautions

•

Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.

Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily. An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter lifetime. Also do not disable the function.

If the motor stalls with the factory settings check the V/f pattern settings (E1-) and the motor setup

(E2-).

If the stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running, consider to use a one size bigger inverter.

-22

Adjusting Analog Input Signals

Adjusting Analog Frequency References

Using the H3- parameters, the analog input values of terminal A1 or the Channels 1 to 3 of the optional analog input card AI-14B can be adjusted.

Related Parameters

H3-09

H3-10

H3-11

H3-12

H3-15

H3-16

H3-17

H3-01

H3-02

H3-03

H3-04

H3-05

H3-06

H3-07

H3-08

Parameter

No.

Name

Frequency reference AI-14B CH1signal level selection

Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input gain

Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input bias

AI-14B CH3 signal level selection

AI-14B CH3 function selection

AI-14B CH3 input gain

AI-14B CH3 input bias

AI-14B CH2 signal level selection

AI-14B CH2 function selection

AI-14B CH2 input gain

AI-14B CH2 input bias

Analog input filter time constant for the AI-14B

Terminal A1 function selection

Terminal A1 input gain

Terminal A1 input bias

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

100.0%

0.0%

0.03 s

100.0%

0.0%

100.0%

0.0%

100.0%

0.0%

Yes

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Adjusting Analog Input Signals

The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage. The voltage level at terminal A1 is 0 to +10V. The analog input channels of the AI-14B option card can be used with 0 to

+10V or -10 to +10V.

The input signal levels can be selected using,

•

H3-01 for AI-14B CH1

•

H3-04 for AI-14B CH3

H3-08 for AI-14B CH2

The signals can be adjustments to the signals can be made using:

•

H3-02 (Gain) and H3-03 (Bias) for Channel 1 of the AI-14B option card

•

H3-06 (Gain) and H3-07 (Bias) for Channel 3 of the AI-14B option card

H3-10 (Gain) and H3-11 (Bias) for Channel 2 of the AI-14B option card

H3-16 (Gain) and H3-17 (Bias) for analog input A1

The gain sets the level of the selected input value if 10V are input, the bias sets the level of the selected input value if 0V is input.

Speed Detection and Speed Limitation

Speed Agreement Function

There are eight different types of frequency detection methods available. The digital outputs M1 to M6 can be programmed for this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to any external equipment.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

L4-01

L4-02

L4-03

L4-04

Name

Speed agreement detection level

Speed agreement detection width

Speed agreement detection level (±)

Speed agreement detection width (±)

Factory

Setting

0.0 Hz

2.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

2.0 Hz

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-03 (M1 – M6 function selection)

The table below shows the necessary H2-01 to H2-03 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement functions. Refer to the timing charts on the following page for details.

Function Setting

2 f ref

/f out

Agree 1 f out

/f set

Agree 1

Frequency detection 1

Frequency detection 2 f ref

/f out

Agree 2 f out

/f set

Agree 2

Frequency detection 3

Frequency detection 4

Setting Precautions

•

With L4-01 an absolute speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected in both directions

(Up and Down).

With L4-03 a signed speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected only in the set direction (positive level

→ Up direction, negative level → Down direction).

Time Charts

The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions.

Related parameter f ref

/f out

Agree 1

L4-01: Speed Agree Level

L4-02: Speed Agree Width f ref

/f out

Agree 2

L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/–

L4-04: Speed Agree Width f ref

/f out

Agree

Frequency reference

Output frequency or motor speed

L4-02

Frequency reference

Output frequency or motor speed

L4-04 f out

/f set

Agree

L4-02 f ref

/f out

Agree 1

OFF ON

(Multi-function output setting = 2) f out

/f set

Agree 1

(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)

L4-02

L4-01

Output frequency or motor speed

L4-01

L4-02

OFF f out

/f set

Agree 1

(Multi-function output setting = 3)

Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1

(L4-01 > | Output frequency |)

L4-02

L4-04 f ref

/f out

Agree 2

(Multi-function output setting = 13) f out

/f set

Agree 2

(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)

L4-04

L4-03

Output frequency or motor speed

OFF ON f out

/f set

Agree 2

(Multi-function output setting = 14)

Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3

(L4-03 > Output frequency)

L4-04

L4-01 L4-03

Output frequency or motor speed

L4-01

L4-02

Freq. Detection 1

OFF

(Multi-function output setting = 4)

Frequency

Detection

Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2

(L4-01 < | Output frequency |)

Freq. Detection 3

OFF

(Multi-function output setting = 15)

Frequency Detection 4

(L4-03 < Output frequency)

L4-02

L4-04

L4-01

L4-03

Output frequency or motor speed

L4-01

L4-02

Freq. Detection 2

OFF ON

(Multi-function output setting = 5)

Freq. Detection 4

OFF ON

(Multi-function output setting = 16)

Speed Detection and Speed Limitation

Limiting the Elevator Speed

To use the high speed limit of UP direction or DOWN direction, one of the digital inputs must be set for “High speed limit switch Up” or “Down” (H1- = 87/88).

Multifunction Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

High speed limit switch (Up direction)

High speed limit switch (Down direction)

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes Yes Yes

High speed limit switch Up

The high speed limit switch UP function is to limit the speed to the leveling speed when the UP direction signal is given. The DOWN direction has no speed limit.

High speed limit switch Down

The high speed limit switch DOWN function is to limit the speed to the leveling speed when the DOWN direction signal is given, the UP direction has no speed limit.

-26

Improving the Operation Performance

Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)

When the load is large, the motor slip also grows and the motor speed decreases. The slip compensation function keeps the motor speed constant, regardless of changes in load. When the motor is operating at the rated load, parameter E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip)

× the slip compensation gain value in parameter C3-01 is added to the output frequency. The function can be used in V/f control or Open Loop Vector control.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

C3-01

C3-02

C3-03

C3-04

C3-05

Name

Slip compensation gain

Slip compensation delay time

Slip compensation limit

Slip compensation during regeneration

Output voltage limit operation selection

Factory

Setting

1.0

2000 ms

200%

Change during

Operation

Yes

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A No

Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01)

The set value of C3-01 depends on the control method. The factory settings are:

•

Open Loop Vector control: 1.0

•

Closed Loop Vector control: 1.0

Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the slip depending on the actual torque output status using the rated slip

(E2-02) as reference.

Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.

1. With Open Loop Vector control set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current). The motor rated slip can be calculated using the values on the motor nameplate and the following formula: slip (Hz) = –

120

The motor data can be set automatically using the autotuning function.

2. With V/f control set C3-01 to 1.0.

3. Apply a load and compare the speed reference and the actual motor speed during run with constant speed.

Adjust the slip compensation gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if the speed is higher than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.

4. Setting C3-01 to 0.0 disables the slip compensation function.

Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C3-02)

The slip compensation delay time constant is set in ms. The setting value of C3-02 is 2000ms. Normally, there is no need to change these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.

Improving the Operation Performance

Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit (C3-03)

Using parameter C3-03 the upper limit for the slip compensation can be set as a percentage, taking the motor rated slip as 100%.

If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even after adjusting the slip compensation gain, the slip compensation limit may have been reached. Increase the limit, and check the speed again. Always make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.

The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.

Slip compensation limit

Output frequency

E1-06: Base frequency

E1-04: Maximum output frequency

Fig 5.39 Slip Compensation Limit

Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration (C3-04)

Enables or disables the slip compensation function during regeneration. The factory setting is enabled.

Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated (C3-05)

Generally the Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage. If the output voltage reference for the motor (monitor parameter U1-06) exceeds the input voltage in the high-speed range, the output voltage becomes saturated, and inverter cannot respond to speed or load changes. This function automatically reduces the output voltage to avoid voltage saturation.

Thereby the speed control accuracy can be maintained even at high speeds (around the rated speed of the motor). By the lowered voltage the current can be around 10% higher compared to the operation without voltage limiter.

Torque Compensation Function Adjustments

The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load, and increases the output torque.

In V/f control the inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage using the terminal resistance value (E2-

05) and adjusts the output voltage (V) to compensate insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation.

The compensation voltage is calculated by the calculated Motor primary voltage loss

× parameter C4-01.

In Open Loop Vector control the motor excitation current and the torque producing current are calculated and controlled separately. The torque compensation affects the torque producing current only.

The torque producing current is calculated by the calculated torque reference

× C4-01.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

C4-01

C4-02

C4-03

C4-04

C4-05

Name

Torque compensation gain

Torque compensation delay time constant

Starting torque compensation value (forward direction)

Starting torque compensation value (reverse direction)

Starting torque compensation time constant

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

1.00

2000 ms

0.0

1 ms

Yes

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A No

Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01)

Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:

Open Loop Vector control

•

If the torque response is slow increase the setting value.

•

If vibrations occur decrease the setting value.

V/f control

•

If the cable is very long, increase the set value.

•

If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set value.

If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.

Setting precautions

•

Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range.

•

Adjust the value in steps of 0.05 only.

Adjusting the Torque Compensation Delay Time Constant (C4-02)

The factory setting depends on the control mode. The factory settings are:

•

V/f control: 200 ms

•

Open loop vector control: 20 ms

Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:

•

If the motor is vibrating or if overshooting occurs, increase the set value.

•

If the torque response is slow, decrease the set value.

Improving the Operation Performance

Starting Torque Compensation Function (C4-03 to C4-05)

A starting torque compensation can be applied to speed up the torque establishment at start in Open Loop Vector control.

It works like shown in the following diagram.

Forward (Reverse) Run command

OFF

Time constant: C4-02

Time constant: C4-05

C4-03 (forward)

C4-04 (reverse, negative polarity)

Torque compensation volume

C4-05 x 4

E1-09

Output frequency

E1-09

Fig 5.40 Time Chart for Starting Torque Frequency

When this function is used, the following should be considered:

•

Both values, C4-03 and C4-04 have to be set.

•

The compensation works for motoring operation only. It can not be used for regenerative operation.

If the starting torque compensation is used and a large shock is generated at the start, increase the starting torque compensation time constant (C4-05)

The function can be not be used unrestricted for elevators, since the load is not know before the start.

Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) (Closed Loop Vector only)

In Closed Loop Vector control the automatic speed regulator (ASR) adjusts the torque reference in order to eliminate the deviation between the speed reference and the measured speed (PG feedback).

Fig 5.1

shows the

ASR structure.

Frequency

Reference

Motor

Speed

C5-01/03/09

C5-02/04/10

C5-08

I-Limit

Delay

Timer

C5-06

Torque

Limits

Torque

Reference

Fig 5.1 ASR Structure Block Diagram

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

C5-01

C5-02

C5-03

C5-04

C5-06

C5-08

C5-09

C5-10

Name

ASR proportional (P) gain 1

ASR integral (I) time 1

ASR proportional (P) gain 2

ASR integral (I) time 2

ASR delay time

ASR integral limit

ASR proportional (P) gain 3

ASR integral (I) time 3

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

40.00

0.500 s

20.00

0.500 s

0.004 s

400%

40.00

0.500 s

Yes

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

No No A

ASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustments

There are three sets of ASR gain and bias, one for the maximum speed (C5-01/02), one the minimum speed for acceleration (C5-03/04) and one for the minimum speed for deceleration (C5-09/10) (see the figure

ASR P,I

C5-01 ASR Gain 1

C5-02 ASR I Time 1

C5-09 ASR Gain 3

C5-10 ASR I Time 3

C5-03 ASR Gain2

C5-04 ASR I time 2

C5-03 ASR Gain2

C5-04 ASR I time 2

0Hz

C5-07 E1-04

Speed(Hz)

During Acceleration

0Hz

C5-07 E1-04

Speed(Hz)

During Deceleration

below).

Adjusting ASR Proportional Gains (C5-01/03/09)

This gain adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness of the ASR is increased when this setting is increased. Oscillation will occur if this setting is increased too much.

•

Increase C5-01 if the ASR is too slow at start or very low frequencies, decrease it if vibrations occur.

Increase C5-03 if the ASR is too slow at high speed or if overshooting occurs at speed changes in the high speed area, decrease it if vibrations occur

Increase C5-09 if ASR is slow in the low speed area or if undershooting occurs at leveling speed. If vibrations occur in the low speed area during deceleration decrease the value.

Adjusting ASR Integral Times (C5-02/04/10)

This parameter sets the speed control (ASR) integral time. Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness and the speed accuracy when the load changes suddenly. Oscillation and overshooting can occur if this setting value is too low.

•

Decrease C5-02 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at start or at very low frequencies, increase it if vibrations occur.

Decrease C5-04 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at high speeds or if overshooting occurs at speed changes in the high speed area, increase it if vibrations occur.

Decrease C5-10 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow in the low speed area or if undershooting occurs at leveling speed. If vibrations occur in the low speed area during deceleration increase the value.

Improving the Operation Performance

Stabilizing Speed (Automatic Frequency Regulator) (Open Loop Vector)

The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function controls the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly applied or removed. It calculates the amount of speed fluctuation using the torque current (Iq) feedback value and compensates the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation. f ref f out

I q

Fig 5.41 AFR Control Loop

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

N2-01

N2-02

Name

Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain

Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

1.00

50 ms

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

No A No

Setting the AFR Gain (N2-01)

Normally there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:

If hunting occurs increase N2-01.

If the response is too low, decrease N2-01.

Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time while checking the response.

Inertia Compensation (Closed Loop Vector Only)

The Feed Forward Control is used to eliminate the speed overshoot or undershoot.

The function can be enabled using parameter n5-01.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

n5-01 n5-02 n5-03

Name

Feed forward control selection

Motor acceleration time

Feed forward proportional gain

Factory setting

Change during operation

0:disabled No kVA dependent

1.0

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Adjustments

Motor acceleration time (n5-02)

The motor acceleration time n5-02 the time which is needed to accelerate the to the rated speed with the rated torque of the motor. The time can be estimated like follows:

•

Make the general setup (V/f pattern, Motor Setup, etc.)

Balance the elevator (car in middle position, Car weight = Counter weight)

•

Set the torque limits to 100% using the L7- parameters.

Set the acceleration time very short (the inverter must reach the torque limit very fast).

Start in any direction and measure the time from zero speed to top speed.

Set this time in n5-02.

Feed Forward Gain (n5-03)

This value usually has not to be changed.

•

Increase the time to improve the response to the speed reference

•

Decrease the time if vibrations occur

Improving the Leveling Accuracy by Slip compensation

This function can be used in V/f and Open Loop Vector control to compensate the motor slip influence at low speed under different load conditions. Thereby the leveling accuracy can be improved.

The inverter measures the current level or torque reference 1.0 sec after speed-agree condition (acceleration finished) for 0.5 sec and calculates the average value to estimate the load. This value is used for the calculation of slip which is added to the speed reference at leveling speed (see

Fig 5.42

measure apply

Fig 5.42 Slip Compensation Working Principle

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

S2-01

S2-02

S2-03

S2-07

Name

Motor Rated rpm

Slip Compensation Gain at Motoring

Slip Compensation Gain at Regenerating

Slip Compensation primary Delay Time

Factory setting

1380rpm

0.7

1.0

200ms

Change during operation

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Improving the Operation Performance

Adjustments

The Slip compensation values can be set separately for motoring and regenerative operation. Before adjusting this function the general setup should have been done (Motor Setup, V/f pattern, Speeds, ASR settings etc.).

To adjust the Slip compensation function do the following in motoring and regenerative mode:

•

Set the motor speed in S2-01 if V/f control is used.

Try to measure the actual motor speed during leveling.

•

If the motor speed is lower than the leveling speed reference increase S2-02 in motoring mode or decrease

S2-03 in regenerative mode.

If the motor speed is higher than the leveling speed reference decrease S2-02 in motoring mode or increase

S2-03 in regenerative mode.

Field Forcing

The field forcing function controls the motor flux and compensates the flux establishment delay of the motor.

Thereby it improves the motor responsiveness on changes in the speed reference or the load.

Field forcing is applied during all operation conditions except DC Injection.

Using parameter d6-06 a field forcing limit can be applied. A setting of 100% is equal to the no-load current set in parameter E2-03.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

d6-03 d6-06

Field forcing selection

Field forcing limit

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

400%

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

No No A

No A A

Adjusting DC injection current level

When Open Loop Vector control mode is used, the DC injection current level at stop for motoring and regenerative operation can be adjusted individually. The motor condition (Regenerative or motoring) is detected when the inverter is running at another speed than leveling speed.

The function can be used to improve the stopping behavior.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

S1-17

S1-18

Name

DC injection current regenerative

DC injection current motoring

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

100%

20%

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

No A No

-34

Protective Functions

Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation

Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the inverter output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.

Stall prevention during operation can be enabled in V/f control only. If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Enable or disable the stall prevention using parameter L3-05. Set the according deceleration times using C1-02 (Deceleration time

1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).

If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set frequency.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

Name

L3-05

L3-06

Stall prevention selection during running function selection

Stall prevention level during running

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

150%

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A No No

Precautions

If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.

Setting Precautions

•

Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.

Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily. An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter lifetime. Also do not disable the function.

If the motor stalls with the factory settings check the V/f pattern (E1-) and the motor setup (E2-).

If the stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running check the mechanical system or consider to use a one size bigger inverter.

Motor Torque Detection / Car Stuck Detection

The inverter provides a torque detection function to detect overtorque (Car stuck) or undertorque. An alarm signal can be output to the digital output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, or M5-M6.

To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection

NO/NC) in one of the parameter H2-01 to H2-03 (digital output terminals M1 to M6 function selection).

Overtorque/undertorque is detected by:

•

observing the output current in V/f control (the inverter rated output current is equal to 100%).

•

observing the torque reference value in Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control (the motor rated torque is equal to 100%).

Protective Functions

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

L6-01

L6-02

L6-03

L6-04

L6-05

L6-06

Name

Torque detection selection 1

Torque detection level 1

Torque detection time 1

Torque detection selection 2

Torque detection level 2

Torque detection time 2

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

150%

10.0 s

150%

0.1 s

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)

Set

Value

Function

Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO

(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)

Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC

(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)

Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO

(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)

Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC

(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)

Yes

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Close d Loop

Vector

Yes Yes Yes

Yes

L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and Operator Display (JVOP-160 only)

The relationship between alarms displayed on the digital operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.

Set

Value

Function

Operator Display

Overtorque/

Undertorque

Detection 1

Overtorque/

Undertorque

Detection 2

– – Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.

Overtorque/Car stuck detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output).

Overtorque/Car stuck detected continuously during operation; operation continues

(warning is output).

Overtorque/Car stuck detection only with speed agree; output is stopped upon detection.

OL3 flashes

OL3 lights up

OL4 flashes

OL4 lights up

Overtorque/Car stuck detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection.

OL3 lights up

Undertorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output).

UL3 flashes

OL4 lights up

UL4 flashes

Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues (warning is output).

UL3 flashes UL4 flashes

Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output is stopped upon detection.

UL3 lights up UL4 lights up

Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection.

UL3 lights up UL4 lights up

Timing Charts

Fig 5.43

and

Fig 5.44

show the timing charts for overtorque and undertorque detection.

Motor current (output torque)

L6-02 or L6-05

Overtorque detection 1 NO or overtorque detection 2 NO

L6-03 or

L6-06

L6-03 or

L6-06

*Overtorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current

(or motor rated torque).

Fig 5.43 Overtorque Detection

Motor current (output torque)

L6-02 or L6-05

Undertorque detection 1 NO or undertorque detection 2 NO

L6-03 or

L6-06

L6-03 or

L6-06

*Undertorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current (or motor rated torque).

Fig 5.44 Undertorque Detection

Car Stuck Detection (OL3, Using Overtorque detection)

The Overtorque detection function can be used to detect a stuck car. The torque detection function 1 can be used for this. Therefore a digital output has to be programmed for “Overtorque detection 1” (H2- = B or

17). Using this with the factory setting car stuck is detected (output is switched) torque/current is higher than

150% for 10 sec. The level can be adjusted in L6-02, the time in L6-03. The output is switched of and an OL3

fault will be indicated (see

Fig 5.45

)

DC Injection/ zero servo speed

Inverter enable (D/I)

Up/Down (D/I)

Selected Speed (D/I)

Fault

Torque is higher than L6-02 detect. time

L6-03

Fig 5.45 Car Stuck fault detection

Protective Functions

Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)

This function allows limitation of motor shaft torque independently for each of the four quadrants. The torque limit can be set as fixed value using parameters or as variable value using an analog input. The torque limit function can be used with Open Loop Vector and Closed Loop Vector control only.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

Name

L7-01

L7-02

L7-03

L7-04

L7-06

L7-07

Forward drive torque limit

Reverse drive torque limit

Forward regenerative torque limit

Reverse regenerative torque limit

Torque limit time constant

Torque limit operation during accel./decel.

* A setting value of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.

Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)

Set

Value

Function

30 During torque limit

Factory Setting

Change during Operation

300%*

200 ms

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

V/f

Control Methods

V/f with

Open

Loop

Vector

No Yes

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes

Setting the Torque Limit Using Parameters

Using L7-01 to L7-04, four torque limits in the following directions can be set individually: Forward drive, reverse drive, forward regenerative and reverse regenerative (see

Fig 5.46

)

Output Torque

L7-01

L7-04

Reverse

Regenerative

Forward

Drive

Output Speed

Reverse

Drive

Forward

Regenerative

L7-03

L7-02

Fig 5.46 Torque Limit Parameters

Using a Digital Output to Signalize Operation at the Torque Limit

If a multifunction output is set for this function (H2-01 to H2-03 is set to “30”), the output is switched ON when the motor output torque reaches one of the torque limits.

Enabling Integral Torque Limit Operation (L7-06 and L7-07)

In Open Loop Vector control an integral operation can be applied to the torque limit function (P-control is standard). This improves the torque limit responsiveness and smoothes the torque limit operation. To enable the integral operation set parameter L7-07 to 1. The integral time constant can be set in parameter L7-06.

Setting Precautions

•

When the output torque reaches the torque limit, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled to prevent the output torque from exceeding the torque limit. The torque limit has the priority.

The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at an output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is lower than 10 Hz, the accuracy is lowered.

Motor Overload Protection

The motor can be protected from overload using the built-in electronic thermal overload relay function.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

E2-01

L1-01

L1-02

Motor rated current

Name

Motor protection selection

Motor protection time constant

Factory

Setting

1.90 A *

1.0 min

Change during

Operation

* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW.)

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Set

Value

Function

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

1F Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level) Yes Yes Yes

Setting Motor Rated Current (E2-01)

Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2-01 (for motor 1). This set value is the base current for the internal thermal overload calculation.

Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics (L1-01)

Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the used motor.

The induction motor's cooling abilities vary with the motor type. Consequently, you must select the electronic thermal protection characteristics.

Set L1-01 to:

0: to disable the thermal motor protection function.

1: to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor (self-cooled).

2: to enable the thermal motor protection for an inverter motor (externally cooled).

3: to enable the thermal motor protection for a special vector motor (externally cooled).

Protective Functions

Setting Motor Protection Operation Time (L1-02)

The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150% overload when it was running with the rated load before (i.e. operating temperature was reached before applying the 150% overload). Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02. The factory setting is 60 sec.

Fig 5.47

shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L1-02 =

1.0 min., operation at 50 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)

Operating time (min.)

Cold start

Hot start

Motor current (%)

E2-01 is set to 100%

Fig 5.47 Motor Protection Operation Time

Setting a Motor Overload Pre-Alarm

If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to a value different from 0) and H2-01 is set to H2-03 (output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to 1F (motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be output at. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum

90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.

Output Current Observation

The inverter can observe the output current and thereby detect if something is wrong in the sequence or with the motor connection. There are two observer functions, one for the start and one during run.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

S1-14

S1-15

SE2 detection time

SE3 detection time

Name

Factory

Setting

200 ms

Change during

Operation

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

SE2 fault (SE2, Current observation at start)

At the brake open delay time (S1-06) + S1-14 after the Up/Down command was given, the output current is measured. If it is below 25% of the motor no-load current (E2-03) a SE2 fault will be output.

SE3 fault (SE3, Current observation during Run)

From the time S1-15 after the Up/Down command was given, the inverter starts to observe the output current continuously. If it falls below 25% of the motor no-load current (E2-03) a SE3 will be output.

-40

Inverter Protection

Inverter Overheat Protection

The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature.

When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off.

To prevent a suddenly and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an over temperature, an overheating prealarm can be output. The temperature level for that pre-alarm can be set in parameter L8-02. Using parameter

L8-03 the inverter operation when an over temperature occurs can be selected.

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the heatsink temperature exceeds the overheat pre-alarm level set in L8-02.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

Name

L8-02

L8-03

Overheat pre-alarm level

Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm operation selection

* The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity.

Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Function Set Value

20 Inverter overheat (OH)

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

°C *

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes Yes Yes

Input Open Phase Protection

This function detects an open input phase by observing the DC bus ripple level.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

L8-05

Name

Input open-phase protection selection

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

1 No

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

The factory setting is enabled. It is not recommended to disable this function.

Inverter Protection

Output Open Phase Protection

This function detects an open output phase by comparing the output current value of each phase with an internal set output open phase detection level (5% of inverter rated current). The detection will not work when the output frequency is below 2% of the base frequency.

Three settings are available:

•

L8-07=0, no output open phase detection

•

L8-07=1, the loss of one phase is detected only

L8-07=2, the loss of 2 or 3 phases is detected as well

The detection delay time can be set in parameter L8-20.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

L8-07

L8-20

Name

Output open-phase protection selection

Output phase loss detection time

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0.2 sec

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Ground Fault Protection

This function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents. Normally it should be 0. If the earth leakage current gets too high, the inverter output will be switched off and a GF fault is shown on the display. The fault contact is activated.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

L8-09 Ground protection selection

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

1 No

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Precautions

•

It is not recommended to disable this function.

A Ground Fault can also be detected if the contactors at the inverter output are opened when the output is still active. Therefore, to prevent false Ground Fault detection check the sequence and make sure, that the output is switched of or base blocked before opening the contactors.

Cooling Fan Control

This function controls the fan which is mounted to the inverters heatsink.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

L8-10

L8-11

Name

Cooling fan control selection

Cooling fan control delay time

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

60 s

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Selecting the Cooling Fan Control

Using parameter L8-10 two modes can be selected:

0: The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON, i.e. a voltage is output. This is the factory setting. The turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in parameter L8-11. After a stop command the inverter waits for this time before switching OFF the cooling fan. The factory setting is 60 sec.

1: The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON.

Setting the Ambient Temperature

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A L8-12 Ambient Temperature 45° C No

At high ambient temperatures an output current derating has to be considered. The derating depends on the ambient temperature. The derating curve is shown in

Fig 5.48

. To ensure a safe inverter protection at high ambient temperatures, always set parameter L8-15 to the actual ambient temperature.

10 0

8 0

6 0

4 0

2 0

0 10 2 0 3 0 4 0

Tem perature (°C)

50 6 0

Fig 5.48 Ambient Temperature Derating Curve

Input Terminal Functions

The digital multifunction inputs can be set for several functions using the H1-01 to H1-05 parameters (terminal S3 to S7 function selection). These following section describes the input functions not mentioned in any other section.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

H1-01

H1-02

H1-03

H1-04

H1-05

Name

Terminal S3 function selection

Terminal S4 function selection

Terminal S5 function selection

Terminal S6 function selection

Terminal S7 function selection

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Blocking Inverter Outputs (Hardware Baseblock)

Using a baseblock command the inverter output can be cut immediately. When baseblock is activated the power supply of the IGBT driver circuit is cut off. In this case the motor will start coasting. If the baseblock command is cleared, the inverter output operation is resumed.

To use the baseblock function one of the digital input S8 must be used. The input is a NC input, i.e. if terminal

S8 is open, the inverter is baseblocked.

Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function)

The external error function activates the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation. Using this function the inverter operation can be stopped on peripheral devices break down or other errors. The digital operator will display EFx (External error [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the number of the terminal at which the external error signal is input. For example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.

To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).

Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.

•

Signal input level from peripheral devices

•

External error detection method

Operation after external error detection

The following table shows the relationship between the external fault conditions and the set value in H1-.

Set

Value

Input Level

(See Note 1.)

NO Contact

Yes

NC Contact

Yes

Error Detection Method

(See Note 2.)

Constant

Detection

During Operation

Yes

Decelerate to

Stop (Error)

Coast to Stop

(Error)

Yes

Operation During Error Detection

Emergency

Stop (Error)

Continue

Operation

(Warning)

Yes

Yes Yes

1. Sets the input level at which errors are detected. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).

2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.

Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.

Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.

Using the Timer Function

The multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7 can be used as timer function input terminals, and multifunction output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be used as timer function output terminals. By setting the delay time, you can prevent chattering of the sensors and switches.

•

Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7) to 18 (timer function input).

Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to

12 (timer function output).

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

Name b4-01 b4-02

Timer function ON-delay time

Timer function OFF-delay time

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0.0 s

V/f

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Input Terminal Functions

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set

Value

Function

18 Timer function input

Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Set

Value

Function

Timer function output

V/f

Yes

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Yes

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes

V/f

Yes

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Yes

Closed

Loop

Vector

Yes

Setting Example

When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.

Timer function input

Timer function output

Fig 5.49 Timer Function Operation Example

Output Contactor Answer Back Detection

The output contactors can be observed using the output contactor answer back function. Therefore an auxiliary contact of the motor contactors must be connected to a digital input which is set to for this function

(H1-=86). If no answer back signal comes from the contactor, the inverter detects a SE1 fault (see below).

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set

Value

Function

V/f

Yes

Control Methods

Open

Loop

Vector

Yes

Closed

Loop ´

Vector

Yes 86 Output contactor answer back

SE1 fault (SE1:Contactor Feed-back Faults)

There are 3 possibilities of fault condition

Case 1: Output contactor of output inverter kept closing before contactor closed command set.

Case 2: Output contactor cannot be closed within the contactor close delay time.

Case 3: Output contactor is opened during inverter running.

Contactor Faults

Run Delay

Speed

Up/Down

Speed selection

Inverter enable(D/I)

Contactor Control(D/O)

DC Injection/ zero servo

Contactor comformation

Case 1

Case 2

Case 3

Output Terminal Functions

The digital multifunction outputs can be set for several functions using the H2-01 to H2-03 parameters (terminal M1 to M6 function selection). These functions are described in the following section.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

H2-01

H2-02

H2-03

Name

Terminal M1-M2 function selection

Terminal M3-M4 function selection

Terminal M5-M6 function selection

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

During Run (Setting: 0) and During Run 2 (Setting: 37)

During Run (Setting: 0)

OFF

The Run command is OFF and there is not output voltage.

The Run command is ON or a voltage is being output.

During Run 2 (Setting: 37)

OFF

The inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking or stopped)

The inverter is outputting a frequency.

These outputs can be used to indicate the inverter’s operating status.

Run command

Baseblock command

OFF

Output frequency

During run 1 output

During run 2 output

OFF ON

OFF

Fig 5.50 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output

Zero Speed (Setting: 1)

Output frequency

Zero speed level (b2-01)

Zero-speed output

OFF

Fig 5.51 Timing Chart for Zero-speed

The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (b2-01).

The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (b2-01).

Inverter Operation Ready (Setting: 6)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output will be switched ON when the initialisation of the inverter at startup has finished without any faults.

During DC Bus Undervoltage (Setting: 7)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus under voltage is detected.

During Baseblock (Setting: 8)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as the inverter output is base blocked.

Frequency Reference Source Selection (Setting: 9)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is ON when the digital operator is selected as frequency reference source. If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF.

Run Command Selection Status (Setting: A)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the digital operator is selected as RUN command source. If any other RUN command source is selected output is switched OFF.

Fault Output (Setting: E)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when any fault different from CPF00 and CPF01 occurs. The output is also not switched at minor faults. (Refer to

page 6-2

pp. for a

fault list.)

Minor Fault Output (Setting: 10)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when a minor fault occurs

(refer to

page 6-8

pp. for an alarm list).

Fault Reset Command Active (Setting: 11)

If a multifunction output is set for this function the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is input at one of the digital inputs.

During Reverse Run (Setting: 1A)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON whenever a RUN command in reverse direction is active. The contact will also be ON during DC injection, Braking and Base Block.

It will not work when a forward RUN command is input.

During Base Block 2 (Setting: 1B)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched OFF as long as a Baseblock command is input at terminal S8

Output Terminal Functions

During Regenerative Operation (Setting: 1D)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the motor works regenerative, i.e. when energy is fed back to the inverter.

Speed Detection at deceleration (Door Zone) (Setting:42)

This output can be used to detect, that the car is in the door zone. The detection is speed dependent.

OFF

V/f control and Open Loop Vector control

The output frequency is lower than S1-27 during deceleration

The output frequency is higher than S1-27 during deceleration

Closed Loop Vector control

The motor speed is lower than S1-27 during deceleration

The motor speed is higher than S1-27 during deceleration

If the Up/Down command is released, this output is switched OFF.

Not Zero Speed (Setting:43)

This function can be used for indicating the reverse condition of Zero speed status.

OFF

The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (b2-01).

The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (b2-01).

-50

Motor and V/f Pattern Setup

Setting Motor Parameters

In vector control method, the motor parameters are set automatically during autotuning (refer to

page 5-51,

Autotuning

. If autotuning does not complete normally, set them manually.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

E2-01

E2-02

E2-03

E2-04

E2-05

E2-06

E2-07

E2-08

E2-10

E2-11

E2-12

Motor rated current

Motor rated slip

Motor no-load current

Name

Number of motor poles (Number of poles)

Motor line-to-line resistance

Motor leak inductance

Motor iron saturation coefficient 1

Motor iron saturation coefficient 2

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

Motor rated output power

Motor iron saturation coefficient 3

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

14.00 A *

2.73 Hz *

4.50 A *

4 poles

0.771

Ω *

19.6%

0.50

0.75

112 W *

3.700 *

1.30

Note All factory-set parameters are for a Yaskawa standard 4-pole motor.

* The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 400 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW).

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

Manual Setting of the Motor Parameters

Motor Rated Current Setting (E2-01)

Set E2-01 to the rated current value on the motor nameplate.

Motor Rated Slip Setting (E2-02)

Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.

Rated speed (rpm) x No. of motor poles

Motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) –

120

Motor No-Load Current Setting (E2-03)

Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally, the motor no-load current is not written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.

Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.

Number of Motor Poles Setting (E2-04)

E2-04 is displayed only when Closed Loop Vector control method is selected. Set the number of motor poles as written on the motor nameplate.

Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting (E2-05)

E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from

Motor and V/f Pattern Setup the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting accordingly.

•

E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (

Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)

B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (

Ω) at 75°C of test repor]t × 0.92 (Ω)

F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (

Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)

Motor Leak Inductance Setting (E2-06)

Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance in E2-06 as percentage of the motor rated voltage. Make this setting when using high-speed motors because the standard value will be too high. (Normally, high speed motors have a low inductance compared to standard motors.) If the inductance is not written on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.

Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings (E2-07)

E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically during rotating autotuning.

Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting (E2-08)

E2-10 is displayed only in V/f control method and can be set to increase the torque compensation accuracy.

The motor iron loss has to be set in kW.

Autotuning

Autotuning sets motor parameters automatically. Therefore some motor data which are usually written at the nameplate must be input and the autotuning has to be performed.

1. If the output contactors is controlled by the inverter it will be closed during autotuning. If the contactors are controlled by an external controller make sure to close the contacts during autotuning.

2. Make sure to close the baseblock contact during autotuning. Otherwise the autotuning can not be started and will terminate with a minor fault.

3. For rotating autotuning make sure to open the brake.

Setting the Autotuning Mode

One of the following three autotuning modes can be set.

•

Rotating autotuning

•

Non-rotating autotuning

Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only

Rotating Autotuning (T1-01 = 0)

Rotating autotuning can be used for Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control only. Set T1-01 to 0, input the data from the motor nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will operate the motor for approximately 1 minute and set the required motor parameters automatically.

Use this tuning mode only, if the motor can rotate freely which means that the ropes are removed.

The gearbox can be connected to the motor.

Non-rotating Autotuning (T1-01 = 1)

Non-rotating autotuning can be used for Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control only. Set T1-01 to 1, input the data from the motor nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The inverter will supply power to the non-rotating motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor parameters will be set automatically. The remaining motor parameters will be set automatically during the first time operation.

Non-rotating Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance (T1-01 = 2)

Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be used in any control mode. This is the only possible autotuning for V/f control.

To perform autotuning in V/f control, set T1-02 (Motor rated power) and T1-04 (Motor rated current) and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the non-rotating motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor line-to-line resistance and cable resistance will be automatically measured.

Precautions Before Using Autotuning

Read the following precautions before using autotuning.

•

Use non-rotating autotuning whenever the load cannot be disconnected from the motor (e.g. the ropes can’t be removed).

Use rotating autotuning whenever performing autotuning when high precision is required or for a motor that is not connected to a load.

•

If the wiring between the Inverter and motor changes by 50 m or more perform non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance.

If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance.

If a mechanical brake is used, make sure that it is not opened for non-rotating autotuning. Make sure that it is opened for rotating autotuning.

Power will be supplied to the motor when non-rotating autotuning is performed even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed

To cancel autotuning, press the STOP key on the Digital Operator.

Precautions for Rotating and Non-rotating Autotuning

If the motor rated voltage is higher than the power supply voltage, lower the base voltage value like shown in

Fig 5.52

to prevent saturation of the Inverter’s output voltage. Use the following procedure to perform auto-

tuning:

1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).

2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):

T1-05 = Base frequency from motor nameplate

Motor rated voltage

3. Perform autotuning.

Motor and V/f Pattern Setup

After the completion of autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s nameplate.

Output voltage

Rated voltage from motor name plate

T1-03

Base frequency from motor name plate x T1-03

Rated voltage from motor name plate

Output frequency

Base frequency from motor name plate

Fig 5.52 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting

When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage

× 0.9. In this case at high speeds the output current will increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.

Precautions after Rotating and Non-rotating Autotuning

If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency

(E1-04) after autotuning.

Parameter Settings for Autotuning

The following parameters must be set for autotuning.

Parameter

Number

T1-01

T1-02

T1-03

T1-04

Name

Autotuning mode selection

Display

Set the autotuning mode.

0: Rotating autotuning

1: Non-rotating autotuning

2: Non-rotating autotuning for lineto-line resistance only

Motor rated power

Set the output power of the motor in

Kilowatts.

Motor rated voltage

Set the rated voltage of the motor.

Motor rated current

Set the rated current of the motor in

Amps.

Setting Range

0 to 2

Factory Setting

Data Displays during

Autotuning

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

2 (V/f and V/f with

PG)

1 (Open and

Closed Loop Vector)

Yes

(only

Yes Yes

10% to 200% of

Inverter rated output

0 to 255.0 V

(200 V class)

0 to 510.0 V

(400 V class)

10% to 200% of

Inverter rated current

Same as Inverter rated output

200.0 V

(200 V class)

400.0 V

(400 V class)

Same as generalpurpose motor with same capacity as Inverter

Yes

T1-05

T1-06

T1-07

T1-08

Motor rated frequency

Number of motor poles

Motor rated speed

Number of

PG pulses per revolution

Set the base frequency of the motor.

Set the number of motor poles.

Set the base speed of the motor in r/min.

Sets the number of pulses for the PG

(pulse generator or encoder) per motor revolution without a multiplication factor

0 to 120.0 Hz

2 to 48 poles

0 to 24000

0 to 60000

50.0 Hz

4 poles

1450 r/min

1024

Yes

T1-09

No load current

Sets the no load current of motor.

0.0 to

13.99

E2-03 No Yes Yes

* 1. Only setting 2 (non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only) is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.

* 2. For an inverter motor or vector control motor, the voltage and frequency may be lower than for a general-purpose motor. Always confirm setting on the nameplate or in test reports. Also, if you know the no-load values, set the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load frequency in T1-05 to obtain better accuracy.

Motor and V/f Pattern Setup

Setting the V/f Pattern

Using the E1- parameters the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as needed. It is not recommended to change the settings when the motor is used in Open Loop or Closed Loop vector control mode.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

E1-01

E1-04

E1-05

E1-06

E1-07

E1-08

E1-09

E1-10

E1-13

Input voltage setting

Max. output frequency (FMAX)

Max. voltage (VMAX)

Base frequency (FA)

Mid. output frequency (FB)

Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)

Min. output frequency (FMIN)

Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)

Base voltage (VBASE)

Name

Factory

Setting

200 V

50.0 Hz

190.0 V

50.0 Hz

Change during

Operation

3.0 Hz

20.0 V

*1*2

0.5 Hz

12.5 V

*1*2

0.0 V

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Q Q Q

* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.

* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)

* 3. The contents of parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.

* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.

Setting Inverter Input Voltage (E1-01)

Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 so that it matches the power supply voltage.

Setting the V/f Pattern

If E1-03 is set to F the V/f pattern can be set individually

using the parameters E1-04 to E1-10. See

Fig 5.53

for details.

Output voltage (V)

Frequency (Hz)

Fig 5.53 V/f pattern setting

INFO

To set the V/f characteristics linear, set E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.

Setting Precautions

When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points:

•

When changing control method, parameters E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that control method.

Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:

E1-04 (FMAX)

≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

Digital Operator/Monitor Functions

Setting Digital Operator/Monitor Functions

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 o2-09 o2-10 o2-12 o2-13 o1-01 o1-02 o1-03 o1-04 o1-05 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04

Name

Monitor selection

Monitor selection after power up

Frequency units of reference setting and monitor

Setting unit for frequency reference related parameters

LCD Display contrast

STOP key during control circuit terminal operation

Inverter kVA selection

User parameter initial value

Frequency reference setting method selection

Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected

Cumulative operation time setting

Cumulative operation time selection

Initialize Mode

Fan operation time setting

Fault trace initialize

“Number of Travels” monitor initialize

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Yes

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Monitor Selection (o1-01)

Using parameter o1-01 the third monitor item that is displayed in drive mode can be selected. This function has no effect on the optional LCD-operator (JVOP-160).

Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON (o1-02)

Using parameter o1-02 the monitor item (U1-) that is to be displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor when the power supply is turned ON can be selected.

Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units (o1-03)

Set the Digital Operator/Monitor frequency reference and display units using parameter o1-03. The setting in o1-03 will affect the display units of the following monitor items:

•

U1-01 (Frequency Reference)

U1-02 (Output Frequency)

•

U1-05 (Motor Speed)

U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start) d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)

Changing the Units for Frequency Parameters Related to V/f settings (o1-04)

Using parameter o1-04 the unit for frequency parameters related to the V/f setting can be changed. If o1-04 is set to 0 it will be Hz. If o1-04 is set to 1 it will be rpm.

Changing the Display Contrast (o1-05)

Using o1-05 the contrast of the LCD display on the digital operator can be raised or lowered. Lowering the o1-

05 value will decrease the contrast and vice versa.

Enabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (o2-01)

Set o2-01 to 1 to enable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator.

If the key is enabled, frequency reference source or the RUN command source can be switched over between

LOCAL (Operator) and REMOTE (b1-01/02 setting).

Disabling the STOP Key (o2-02)

This parameter is used to set whether the STOP key on the operator is active during remote control (b1-02

≠ 0) or not.

If o2-02 is set to 1, a STOP command from the operators STOP key will be accepted. If o2-02 is set to 0 it will be disregarded.

Saving User Parameters (o2-03)

You can save the current Inverter parameter setting values as user-set parameter initial values. Therefore parameter o2-03 has to be set to 1.

To initialize the inverter parameters using the user-set initial values in memory set parameter A1-03 to 1110.

To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.

Changing the Inverter Capacity Setting (o2-04)

The inverter capacity setting can be set using parameter o2-04. Refer to

page 4-53, Factory Settings that

Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)

to see parameters that depend on this setting.

Normally it not necessary to change this setting, unless the control card has been changed.

Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the

Enter Key (o2-05)

This function is active when frequency references are input from the Digital Operator/Monitor. When o2-05 is set to 1, you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN keys without using the Enter key.

Operation Selection when the Digital Operator/Monitor is Disconnected (o2-06)

This function selects the operation when the digital operator gets disconnected when a RUN command is active.

If o2-06 is set to 0 the operation is continued.

If o2-06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop. The fault contact is operated. When the operator is reconnected an OPR (Operator disconnected) is shown.

Cumulative Operation Time (o2-07 and o2-08)

The inverter has a function that counts the operation time of the inverter cumulatively.

Using parameter o2-07 the cumulative operation time can be changed, e.g. after a replacement of the control board. If parameter o2-08 is set to 0 the inverter counts the time whenever the power supply is switched ON. If o2-08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only. The factory setting is 0.

Digital Operator/Monitor Functions

Cooling Fan Operation Time (o2-10)

This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively.

Using parameter o2-10 the counter can be reset, e.g. when the fan was replaced.

Fault Trace Initialize (o2-12)

This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting parameter o2-12 to 1.

“Number of Travels” counter Initialize (o2-15)

Using this parameter the lift operation counter monitor (U1-55) can be initialized.

Copying Parameters (JVOP-160 only)

The Digital Operator/Monitor can perform the following three functions using a built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).

•

Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator/Monitor by setting o3-01 to 1 (READ)

•

Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor to the Inverter by setting o3-01 to 2

(COPY)

Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor with Inverter parameters settings by setting o3-01 to 3 (VERIFY)

The data saved in the operator can be protected from overwriting by setting parameter o3-02 to 0. In the case a

READ command can not be executed. If it is nevertheless still done, “PrE” will be displayed at the operator.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

o3-01 o3-02

Copy function selection

Read permitted selection

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator/Monitor (READ)

To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator/Monitor use the following method.

Table 5.1 READ Function Procedure

Step

No.

Explanation

Digital Operator/Monitor Display

1 Press the Menu Key and select advanced programming mode.

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 - 00=1

Select Language

Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function

Selection).

4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.

5 Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key.

6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function will start.

-ADV-

COPY Function o3 - 01=0

Copy Funtion Sel

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0

COPY SELECT

*0*

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 1

*0*

INV OP READ

-ADV-

READ

INV OP READING

7 If the READ function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.

-ADV-

READ

READ COMPLETE

8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0

COPY SELECT

*0*

If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to

page 6-14, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults

for corrective actions.

Digital Operator/Monitor Functions

Writing Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor to the Inverter

(COPY)

To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor to the Inverter, use the following method.

Table 5.2 COPY Function Procedure

Step

No.

Explanation

Digital Operator/Monitor Display

1 Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode.

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.

Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function

Selection).

4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.

5 Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key.

6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function will start.

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 - 00 = 1

Select Language

-ADV-

COPY Function o3 - 01 = 0

Copy Funtion Sel

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0

*0*

COPY SELECT

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 2

*0*

OP INV WRITE

-ADV-

COPY

OP INV COPYING

7 If the COPY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.

-ADV-

COPY

COPY COMPLETE

8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0

COPY SELECT

*0*

If an error is displayed, set the parameters again. Refer to

page 6-14, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults

for corrective actions.

Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator/Monitor Parameter Set Values

(VERIFY)

To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator/Monitor parameter set values, use the following method.

Table 5.3 VERIFY Function Procedure

Step

No.

Explanation

Digital Operator/Monitor Display

1 Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode.

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.

Press the Increment and Decrement Key until the parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function Selection).

4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the function setting display.

5 Change the set value to 3 using the Increment Key.

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 - 00 = 1

Select Language

-ADV-

COPY Function o3 - 01=0

Copy Funtion Sel

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0

*0*

COPY SELECT

-ADV-

Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 3

*0*

OP INV VERIFY

6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function will start.

-ADV-

VERIFY

DATA VERIFYING

7 If the VERIFY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.

-ADV-

VERIFY

VERIFY COMPLETE

8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3 01 = 0

COPY SELECT

*0*

If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to

page 6-14, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults

for corrective actions.

Application Precautions

INFO

When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter data and the Digital

• Operator/Monitor data.

• Inverter product and type

• Software number

• Inverter capacity and voltage class

• Control method

Digital Operator/Monitor Functions

Prohibiting Overwriting of Parameters

If A1-01 is set to 0, all parameters except A1-01 and A1-04 are write protected, U1-, U2- and U3-

will be displayed. If A1-01 is set to 1, only the parameters A1-01, A1-04 and A2- can be read or written, U1-, U2- and U3- will be displayed. All other parameters will not be displayed.

If you set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 1B

(write parameters permitted), parameters can be written from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing parameters other than the frequency reference is prohibited. However, the parameters can be read.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

A1-01 Parameter access level

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Yes

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Setting a Password

When a password is set in A1-05 and if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, only the settings of parameters A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32 can be modified.

The setting of all parameters except A1-00 can be prohibited using the password function in combination with setting parameter A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

A1-01

A1-04

A1-05

Parameter access level

Password

Password setting

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

Setting a Password

The password can be set in parameter A1-05. Normally A1-05 is not displayed. To display and modify A1-05 the MENU and Reset key must be pressed together in the A1-04 display.

Displaying User-set Parameters Only

The A2 parameters (user-set parameters) and A1-01 (parameter access level) can be used to establish a parameter set that contains only the most important parameters.

Set the number of the parameter to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. Using the advanced programming mode you can read and modify A1-01 to A1-03 and the parameters set in A2-01 to

A2-32 only.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

A2-01 to

A2-32

User setting parameters

Name

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

A A A

PG Option Cards

To get a more precise speed control the inverter can be equipped with a PG option card to connect a pulse generator. Two different PG cards can be used, the PG-B2 and the PG-X2. Refer to

page 2-24, Option Card Models and Specifications

to see details.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

F1-01

F1-02

F1-03

F1-04

F1-05

F1-06

F1-08

F1-09

F1-10

F1-11

F1-14

Name

PG constant

Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)

Operation selection at overspeed (OS)

Operation selection at deviation (DEV)

PG rotation

PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)

Overspeed (OS) detection level

Overspeed detection delay time (OS)

Excessive speed deviation (DEV) detection level

Excessive speed deviation detection delay time (DEV)

PG open-circuit detection delay time

1024

115%

1.0 s

10%

0.5 s

2.0 s

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

No No Q

Using PG Speed Control Card

There are two types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in Closed Loop Vector control:

•

PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.

•

PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers (RS-422).

For the mounting instructions, specifications and connection diagrams refer to

page 2-24, Installing and Wiring Option Cards

If Open Loop Vector control is used and a PG card is installed, the speed detected by the PG card is displayed in the monitor parameter U1-05. Therefore the PG constant has to be set in parameter F1-01. The direction of the speed detection can be changed by parameter F1-05.

To change the U1-05 value to the internally calculated value remove the PG card.

IMPORTANT

Setting Number of PG Pulses (F1-01)

Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses per revolution.

Suit the PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction (F1-05)

Parameter F1-05 suits the PG rotation direction to the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating forwards, set whether it is A-phase leads or B-phase leads.

Inverter

Forward command

Motor PG (encoder)

A-phase leads when set value = 0

A-phase

B-phase

Pulse output

B-phase leads when set value = 1

A-phase

B-phase

Example: Forward rotation of standard motor (PG)

Forward command

Motor output axis rotates counter-clockwise during Inverter forward command.

Rotation

(CCW)

A-phase

B-phase

With the used PG the A-phase leads (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.

Generally, the A-phase leads when the rotation direction is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the shaft side

(FWD command is input).

Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio (F1-06)

This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B2. Set the division ratio for the PG pulse monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the two lower place digits.

The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:

Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32

F1-06 =

The division ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32

≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the division ratio is

1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are output at the pulse monitor.

Detecting PG Open Circuit (F1-02 and F1-14)

Parameter F1-02 selects the stopping method when a PG disconnection is detected.

PG open (PGO) is only detected when the inverter is running at least with a frequency reference higher than

1% of the maximum output frequency or above the minimum frequency (E1-09) and the PG feedback signal is missing for the time set in F1-14 or longer.

Detecting Motor Overspeed (F1-03, F1-08 and F1-09)

An overspeed (OS) is detected when the motor speed continues to exceed the set frequency value in F1-08 for a time longer than set in F1-09. After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.

PG Option Cards

Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference (F1-04, F1-10 and F1-11)

Speed deviation is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the speed reference and the actual motor speed) is too large. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected only after a speed agreement (speed reference and actual motor speed are within the setting range of L4-02) and if a speed deviation higher than the set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.

-68

Battery Operation

Using battery operation the car can be moved to the next floor if the power supply fails. The battery operation, must be enabled by a digital input (H1- = 85).

The battery voltage must be set in parameter L2-11.

Related Constants.

Parameter

No.

L2-11 Battery Voltage

Name

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Function mane Setting

85 Battery operation command

Factory setting

Change during operation

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Battery operation wiring

SoftCharge

Resistor

C R

Contorl Power

200VClass(DC250V 300V)

400VClass(DC500V 600V)

Battery Operation setting 85

Battery Operation

Battery sequence

The following timing chart shows the sequence of battery operation.

Vpn

Motor speed

UV det level

Coasting

Brake

Fault

C,D input contactor OFF

Battery voltage battery voltage x base speed

300(600 *1 )x2

*1: 400VClass using 600V

Approx. 1min

The power source of these contactors must keep supplying even if power loss.

Battery operation

Battery operation command E

Main Circuit contactor

A,B

A’contactor

Inverter ready

* exteranal operation signal

Approx. 5sec ON

0.2 0.3sec

Approx.

1sec

No.

Description

When the bus voltage is blow the under voltage level, the inverter detects the under voltage (UV) fault.

Turn off the RUN command.

C and D contactors must be turned off and turn on the motor mechanical brake.

Need the approximately 5sec to start battery operation.

The multi-function digital input which is assigned with the battery operation command (E) must be turned ON.

The A’ contactor must be turned ON after passing 0.2~0.3 sec when A and B main contactors are turned ON.

The RUN commands turns ON after inverter ready status set.

The battery operation time must be within 1min.

E, A, B and A’ contactors must be turned OFF after RUN command OFF.

(CAUTION)

1. Battery operation speed

The speed during the battery operation will be limited as the following formula.

Speed during battery operation= (battery voltage x base speed) / (300Vx2)

When the 400V Class will be 600Vx2

2.Continuous operation is prohibited.

The cooling fan of inverter is stopped due to the low bus voltage.

Therefore the continuous operation of inverter is prohibited.

Battery selection

Use the following battery

Main bus voltage

Control voltage

200V Class

48V

200V

400V Class

96V

400V

Note Main bus voltage during battery operation is decided based on the 10% of motor base speed.

Voltage drop must be less than 5% under the following load condition.

Current of control power: 50W/ control voltage

Current of main power: (motor rated power x speed during battery operation x 200%) /

(battery voltage x 60% (motor efficiency) x motor base speed)

Automatic Fault Restart

The inverter can be set to restart automatically when a fault occurs. The maximum number of restarts can be selected as well as the operation mode of the fault relay.

Auto-resetable Fault codes are: UV1, GF, OC, OV, OL2, OL3, OL4, UL3, UL4, PF, LF

Related Constants.

Parameter

No.

L5-01

L5-02

Name

Number of restarts

Restart operation selection

Factory setting

Change during operation

V/f

Open

Loop

Vector

Closed

Loop

Vector

Number of restarts

The number of restarts can be set in parameter L5-01. The fault restart interval time is 2.0 sec.

Fault

Injection/ zero servo

Speed

Up/Down

Speed command

Hardware BB

Brake opened (D/O)

Fault (D/O)

Auto-Reset

2 sec interval time

The auto-reset signal is accepted when the hardware base block signal is recieved .

Fault Relay Operation

Parameter L5-02 can be used to enable or disable the fault relay (terminal MA-MB-MC) during fault retry condition.

•

L2-02 = 1 enabled the fault relay.

L2-02 = 0 disables the fault relay.

Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasures for Inverter and motor problems.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................6-2

Troubleshooting .........................................................6-15

-2

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

This section describes the fault and alarm functions of the Inverter. These functions include fault detection, alarm detection, operator programming error detection and auto-tuning error detection.

Fault Detection

When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates and the Inverter output is switched OFF causing the motor to coast to stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.

The faults can be categorized in two groups:

•

Faults that can be rested using an input or the reset key at the Digital Operator without cycling the power

(resetable faults)

Faults that require to cycle the power (non-resetable faults)

When a fault has occurred refer to the following identify the fault and to correct the causes.

To reset a fault it is necessary to remove the fault and the RUN signal. Only then a Reset signal is accepted.

See the following tables for the faults and corrective actions.

Table 6.20 Resetable Faults

Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions

Remove the motor and run the

Inverter without the motor.

Ground Fault

The ground current at the Inverter output exceeded 50% of the Inverter rated output current and L8-09=1

(Enabled).

One Inverter output was shorted to ground and/or a DCCT is defective.

Check the motor for a phase to ground short.

Check the output current with a clampmeter to verify the DCCT reading.

Over Current

PUF

DC Bus Fuse Open

Overcurrent

The Inverter’s output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level.

DC Bus Fuse

The fuse in the main circuit is open.

Warning:

Never run the Inverter after replacing the DC bus fuse without checking for shorted components.

Shorted Inverter output phase-tophase, shorted motor, locked rotor, load too heavy, accel/decel time too short, contactor on the Inverter output has opened or closed, a special motor or a motor with a rated current larger than the Inverter’s output current is used.

Remove the motor and run the

Inverter without the motor.

Check the motor for a phase-tophase short.

Verify the accel/decel times

(C1-).

Check the Inverter for a phase-tophase short at the output.

Shorted output transistor(s) or terminals.

Check the motor and the motor cables for short circuits or insulation failures (phase-to-phase).

Replace the inverter after correcting the fault.

DC Bus Overvolt

DC Bus Overvoltage

The DC bus voltage has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.

Default detection levels are:

200 V class: 410 VDC

400 V class: 820 VDC

The deceleration time is set too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.

The power supply voltage is too high.

Increase the deceleration time

(C1-02/04/06/08) or connect a braking option.

Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the inverter’s specifications.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Display

UV1

DC Bus Undervolt

UV2

CTL PS Undervolt

UV3

MC Answerback

Input Phase Loss

Output Phase Loss

Table 6.20 Resetable Faults

Meaning Probable Causes

The voltage fluctuations of the power supply are too high.

Corrective Actions

Check the input voltage.

A momentary power loss occurred.

DC Bus Undervoltage

The DC bus voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection Level

(L2-05). The default settings are:

200V class: 190 VDC

400 V class: 380 VDC

The terminal screws of the input power supply are loose.

An open-phase error occurred at the input terminals.

Check the wiring of the input terminals.

Check the input voltage and the wiring of the input terminals.

The acceleration time is set too short.

Extend the settings in

C1-01/03/05/07

Main Circuit MC

Operation Failure

The MC stopped responding during

Inverter operation.

An error occurred in the inrush current prevention circuit while the Inverter was running.

Replace the Inverter.

Control Power Supply

Undervoltage

Undervoltage of the control circuit while the Inverter was running.

External load was pulling down the

Inverter’s power supplies or there was an internal short in the power/gate drive board.

Remove all connection to the control terminals and cycle the power to the Inverter.

Replace the Inverter.

Inrush Current Prevention Circuit

Fault

An overheating of the charging resistor for the DC bus capacitors occurred.

The MC of the charging circuit did not respond 10 sec. after the MC ON signal has been output.

(Applicable Inverter Capacities

200 V class: 37 to 110 kW

400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)

The contactor of the inrush current prevention circuit is defective.

Cycle the power to the Inverter.

Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.

Main Circuit Voltage Fault

An unusual big ripple on the DC bus voltage has been detected.

Only detected when L8-05=1

(enabled)

The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.

A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.

A momentary power loss occurred

Tighten the input terminal screws

The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too high.

The voltage balance between the input phases is bad.

Check the power supply voltage

Output Open-phase

An open-phase occurred at the

Inverter output.

The fault is detected when the output current falls below 5% of the inverter rated current and L8-07=1 (enabled)

There is a broken wire in the output cable.

There is a broken wire in the motorwinding.

The output terminals are loose.

The motor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the Inverter's maximum motor capacity.

Reset the fault after correcting its cause.

Check the motor and Inverter capacity.

Display

Heatsink Overtemp

OH1

Heatsink Max Temp

DynBrk Transistr

OL1

Motor Overload

OL2

Inv Overload

OL3

Car Stuck

OL4

Car Stuck

Meaning

Table 6.20 Resetable Faults

Probable Causes

Heatsink Overheat

The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8-02 and L8-03 = 0 to 2.

The ambient temperature is too high.

There is a heat source nearby.

The Inverter's cooling fan(s) stopped.

Corrective Actions

Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.

Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive.

Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped

Heatsink Overheat

The temperature of the Inverter’s heatsink exceeded 105 °C.

Inverter’s Cooling Fan Stopped

The Inverter's internal cooling fan has stopped

(18.5 kW and larger).

Replace the cooling fan(s).

The ambient temperature is too high.

There is a heat source nearby.

Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.

Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive.

The Inverter’s cooling fan(s) stopped.

The Inverter’s internal cooling fan has stopped

(18.5 kW and larger).

Replace the cooling fan(s).

Dynamic Braking Transistor

The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.

Defective or failed dynamic braking resistor caused braking transistor damage.

Cycle power to the Inverter.

Replace the Inverter.

Motor Overload

Detected when L1-01 = 1 to 3 and the

Inverter’s output current exceeded the motor overload curve.

The overload curve is adjustable using parameter E2-01 (Motor Rated Current), L1-01 (Motor Protection Selection) and L2-02 (Motor Protection

Time Constant)

The load is too large. The acceleration time, deceleration time or cycle time are too short.

The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect for the application.

The setting of Motor Rated Current

(E2-01) is incorrect.

Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel/decel times

(C1-).

Check the V/f characteristics (E1-

Check the setting of Motor Rated

Current Setting (E2-01).

The load is too large. The acceleration time or deceleration times are too short.

Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel/decel times

(C1-).

Inverter Overload

The Inverter output current exceeded the Inverter’s overload capability.

The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect for the application.

Check the V/f characteristics (E1-

The size of the Inverter is too small.

Check the setting of Motor Rated

Current Setting (E2-01).

Overtorque/Car Stuck Detection 1

The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector

Control) exceeded L6-02 for longer then the time set in

L6-03 and L6-01 = 3 or 4.

Overtorque/Car Stuck Detection 2

The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector

Control) exceeded L6-05 for longer then the time set in

L6-06 and L6-04 = 3 or 4.

Motor was overloaded.

Ensure the values in L6-02 and

L6-03 are appropriate.

Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.

Ensure the values in L6-05 and

L6-06 are appropriate.

Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Display

UL3

Undertorq Det 1

UL4

Undertorq Det 2

Overspeed Det

PGO

PG Open

DEV

Speed Deviation

SVE

Zero Servo Fault

Out of Control

EF0

Opt External Flt

Table 6.20 Resetable Faults

Meaning

Undertorque Detection 1

The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-02 for longer then the time set in

L6-03 and L6-04 = 7 or 8.

Probable Causes

Motor was underloaded.

Corrective Actions

Ensure the values in L6-02 and

L6-03 are appropriate.

Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.

Undertorque Detection 2

The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-05 for longer then the time set in

L6-06 and L6-04 = 7 or 8.

Motor was underloaded.

Motor Overspeed

Detected when F1-03 = 0 to 2 and A1-

02 = 3.

The motor speed feedback

(U1-05) exceeded the setting in F1-08 for a longer time than the setting in

F1-09.

Overshooting/Undershooting are occurring.

The reference was too high.

The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 are not appropriate.

Ensure the values in L6-05 and

L6-06 are appropriate.

Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.

Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group.

Check the reference circuit and reference gain.

Check the settings in F1-08 and

F1-09.

There is a break in the PG wiring.

PG Disconnection

Detected when F1-02 = 0 to 2 and A1-

02 = 3

Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting in F1-14.

The PG is wired incorrectly.

Power is not being supplied to the PG.

Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.

Fix the wiring.

Supply power to the PG properly.

Wrong brake control sequence when a brake is used.

Check if the brake is opened when the RUN command is applied.

The load is too large. Reduce the load.

Excessive Speed Deviation

Detected when F1-04 = 0 to 2 and A1-

02 = 3

The speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for a time longer than the setting F1-11

The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.

The load is locked.

The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 are not appropriate.

Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.

Check the mechanical system.

Check the settings in F1-10 and

F1-11.

Wrong brake control sequence when a brake is used.

Check if the brake is opened when the RUN command is applied.

Zero Servo Fault

The motor position moved during

Zero Servo Operation.

The torque limit is too small.

The load torque is too large.

Control Fault

A torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration stop in Open Loop Vector control.

Motor parameters were not set properly.

Increase the torque limit.

Decrease the load torque.

Check for signal noise.

Check the motor parameters.

External fault input from Communications Option Card

An external fault condition was present, input from a communication option card.

Check for an external fault condition.

Verify the parameters.

Verify communication signals

Display

EF3

Ext Fault S3

EF4

Ext Fault S4

EF5

Ext Fault S5

EF6

Ext Fault S6

EF 7

Ext Fault S7

Memobus Com Err

BUS

Option Com Err

SE1

Sequence Error 1

SE2

Sequence Error 2

SE3

Sequence Error 3

Meaning

Table 6.20 Resetable Faults

Probable Causes

External fault at terminal S3

External fault at terminal S4

External fault at terminal S5

External fault at terminal S6

An “external fault” was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to

S7).

Corrective Actions

Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition.

External fault at terminal S7

MEMOBUS Communication Error

Detected when control data was not received correctly for two seconds and

H5-04 = 0 to 2 and

H5-05=1.

Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.

Option Communication Error

After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.

Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.

Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.

Detected no output contactor answer back for S1-16 time setting.

The output contactor or auxiliary switch is malfunction.

Check the output contactor.

Detect the output current below 25% of no-load current at opening motor brake.

The output contactor is opened.

Detect the output current below 25% of no-load current during running.

The output contactor is opened.

Check the output contactor.

Fig 6.21 Non-resetable Faults

CPF00

COM-ERR(OP&INV)

CPF01

COM-ERR(OP&INV)

CPF02

BB Circuit Err

CPF03

EEPROM Error

Digital Operator/Monitor Communication Fault 1

Communication with the digital operator could not be established within 5 seconds after the power was supplied to the Inverter.

Digital operator cable was not securely connected or digital operator is defective and/or control board is defective

Disconnect the Digital Operator/

Monitor and then connect it again.

Replace the Inverter.

Cycle the power to the Inverter.

CPU External RAM Fault The control board is damaged.

Replace the Inverter.

Digital Operator/Monitor Communication Fault 2

After communications with the digital operator was established, the communication stopped for 2 seconds or more.

Digital operator cable was not securely connected or digital operator is defective

The control board is damaged.

Disconnect the Digital Operator/

Monitor and then connect it again.

Cycle the power to the Inverter.

Replace the Inverter.

Baseblock circuit error

A baseblock circuit error occurred at power-up.

EEPROM error

Check sum is not valid

Gate array hardware failure at powerup.

Perform an initialization to factory defaults.

Cycle the power to the Inverter.

Replace the Inverter.

Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.

Perform an initialization to factory defaults.

Cycle the power to the Inverter

Replace the Inverter.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

CPF04

Internal A/D Err

CPF05

External A/D Err

CPF06

Option Error

CPF07

RAM-Err

CPF08

WAT-Err

CPF09

CPU-Err

CPF10

ASIC-Err

CPF20

Option A/D Error

CPF21

Option CPU Down

CPF22

Option Type Err

CPF23

Option DPRAM Err

Fig 6.21 Non-resetable Faults

CPU Internal A/D Converter Fault

CPU External A/D Converter Fault

Option Card Connection Fault

Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.

Perform an initialization to factory defaults.

Cycle the power to the Inverter.

Replace the Inverter.

Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.

Perform an initialization to factory defaults.

Cycle the power to the Inverter.

Replace the Inverter.

The Option Card is not connected properly.

Turn off the power and reinstall the Option Card again.

The Inverter or Option Card is damaged

Replace the Option Card or the

Inverter.

Cycle the power to the Inverter

ASIC Internal RAM fault

Watchdog Timer Fault

CPU-ASIC Mutual

Diagnosis Fault

The control circuit is damaged.

Replace the Inverter.

Cycle the power to the Inverter

Replace the Inverter.

Cycle the power to the Inverter

Replace the Inverter.

ASIC version fault

Communication Option Card A/D Converter Error

Self-diagnosis Fault of

Option Board

Option board connection is not correct.

Option card A/D converter is faulty.

Turn off the power and re-install the option board again

Remove all inputs to the option board

Perform an initialization to factory defaults.

Cycle the power to the Inverter

Replace the option board

Replace the inverter

Perform an initialization to factory defaults.

Noise or spike was on the communication line and/or defective option board.

Cycle the power to the Inverter

Replace the option board

Option Board Code Number Fault

Option Board

Interconnection Fault

Replace the Inverter

Remove any option boards

Perform an initialization to factory defaults

Unrecognizable option board is connected to the control board. Cycle the power to the Inverter

Replace the option board

Replace the Inverter

Turn off the power and reinstall the option board again

An option board was not correctly connected to the control board, or an option board that was not made for the

Inverter is attached to the control board.

Perform an initialization to factory defaults

Cycle the power to the Inverter

Replace the option board

Replace the Inverter

Alarm Detection

Alarms are Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The system will automatically return to its original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed.

During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator/Monitor display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03) if programmed

When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.

Display

External Fault

(flashing)

Table 6.22 Alarm Detection

Meaning

Forward/Reverse Run Commands

Input Together

Both the forward and the reverse run commands are input simultaneously for 500ms or more. This alarm stops the motor.

Probable causes Corrective Actions

The external forward and reverse command were input simultaneously.

Check external sequence logic, so only one input is received at a time.

DC Bus Undervolt

(flashing)

DC Bus Overvolt

(flashing)

Heatsnk Overtmp

(flashing)

DC Bus Undervoltage

The following conditions occurred

• The DC bus voltage was below the

Undervoltage Detection Level Setting (L2-05).

• The MC of the inrush current prevention circuit opened.

• The control power supply voltage when below the CUV level.

UV Alarm is only detected when the drive is in a stopped condition

For the probable causes please have a look at UV1, UV2 and UV3 in table

7.1.

For the corrective actions please have a look at UV1, UV2 and

UV3 in table 7.1

DC Bus Overvoltage

The DC bus voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.

200 V class: 410 VDC

400 V class: 820 VDC

OV Alarm is only detected when the drive is in a stopped condition

The power supply voltage is too high.

Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the

Inverter’s specifications

Heatsink Overheat

The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the temperature programmed in L8-02.

Enabled when L8-03 = 3

The ambient temperature is too high.

There is a heat source nearby.

The Inverter cooling fan(s) has stopped.

Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.

Reduce the ambient temperature around the Inverter

Replace the cooling fan(s).

OL3

Car Stuck

(flashing)

Overtorque Detection 1

The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) exceeded L6-02 for longer then the time set in

L6-03 and L6-01 = 1 or 2

Motor was overloaded

Ensure the values in L6-02 and

L6-03 are appropriate.

Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.

OL4

Car Stuck

(flashing)

Overtorque Detection 1

The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) exceeded L6-02 for longer then the time set in

L6-03 and L6-01 = 1 or 2

Motor was overloaded

Ensure the values in L6-05 and

L6-06 are appropriate.

Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

EF3

Ext Fault S3

(flashing)

EF4

Ext Fault S4

(flashing)

EF5

Ext Fault S5

(flashing)

EF6

Ext Fault S6

(flashing)

EF7

Ext Fault S7

(flashing)

Display

UL3

Undertorque Det 1

(flashing)

UL4

Undertorque Det 2

(flashing)

Overspeed Det

(flashing)

PGO

PG Open

(flashing)

DEV

Speed Deviation

(flashing)

EF0

Opt External Flt

(flashing)

Meaning

Table 6.22 Alarm Detection

Probable causes

Undertorque Detection 1

The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-02 for longer then the time set in L6-03 and L6-01 =

5 or 6.

Motor was underloaded

Corrective Actions

Ensure the values in L6-02 and

L6-03 are appropriate.

Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.

Undertorque Detection 2

The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-05 for longer then the time set in L6-06 and L6-04 =

5 or 6.

Motor was underloaded

Ensure the values in L6-05 and

L6-06 are appropriate.

Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.

Overspeed Alarm

Detected when A1-02 = 1 or 3 and F1-

03 = 3.

The motor speed feedback

(U1-05) exceeded the value set in F1-

08 for a time longer than the setting in

F1-09.

Overshooting/undershooting are occurring.

The reference was too high.

The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 are not appropriate.

Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group.

Check the reference circuit and reference gain.

Check the settings in F1-08 and

F1-09

PG Disconnection

Detected when F1-02 = 3 and A1-02 =

1 or 3.

Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting in F1-14

There is break in the PG wiring.

The PG is wired incorrectly.

Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.

Fix the wiring

Power is not being supplied to the PG. Fix the wiring.

Power isn't being supplied to the PG.

Supply power to the PG properly.

The load is too large.

Excessive Speed Deviation

Detected when F1-04 = 3 and

A1-02 = 1 or 3.

The speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the setting in F1-11.

The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.

The load is locked.

The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 are not appropriate.

Reduce the load.

Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.

Check the mechanical system.

Check the settings in F1-10 and

F1-11.

Communication Option Card External

Fault

An external fault condition was present, input from a communication option card.

Check for an external fault condition.

Verify the parameters.

Verify communication signals

External fault at terminal S3

External fault at terminal S4

External fault at terminal S5

External fault at terminal S6

External fault at terminal S7

An external fault was input from a multi-function input terminal

(S3 to S7) that is programmed for external fault function that alarms only and continues to run the Inverter.

Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition

Display

MEMOBUS Com Err

(flashing)

BUS

Option Com Err

(flashing)

Ext Run Active

Cannot Reset

CALL

ComCall

(flashing)

Table 6.22 Alarm Detection

Meaning Probable causes

MEMOBUS Communications Alarm

Detected when control data was not received correctly for two seconds and

H5-04 = 3 and

H5-05 = 1.

Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.

Corrective Actions

Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.

Option Communications Alarm

After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.

Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.

Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.

Detected when a RESET command is input while the RUN command is still active

The RUN command has not been removed and a RESET command is input by digital input or by the

RESET button on the digital operator.

Remove the RUN signal first and reset the error.

Communications on Standby

Communication has not yet been established.

Connection was not made properly or user software was not configured to the proper baud rate or configuration

(e.g. Parity).

Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Operator Programming Errors

An Operator Programming Error (OPE) occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is inappropriate. The Inverter will not operate until the parameter is set correctly; however, no alarm or fault outputs will occur. If an OPE occurs, change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in

Table 6.23

. When OPE error is displayed, press the ENTER key to display U1-34 (OPE Detected).

This monitor will display the parameter that is causing the OPE error.

Display

OPE01 kVA Selection

OPE02

Limit

OPE03

Terminal

Table 6.23 Operator Programming Errors

Meaning

Inverter kVA Setting Error

Parameter Setting

Out of Range

Multi-function Input

Selection Error

Probable Causes

The control board was replaced and the kVA parameter (o2-04) is set incorrectly

Corrective Actions

Enter the correct kVA setting (o2-

04) by referring to the table “Factory settings that change with the

Inverter kVA setting” on page 5-

60.

Parameter setting was outside of the allowable range.

Verify the parameter settings.

One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-

01 to H1-05) settings:

• Duplicate functions were selected.

• External Baseblock NO (8) and

External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the same time.

• The Emergency Stop Command

NO (15) and NC(17) are set simultaneously.

Verify the parameter settings in

H1-

OPE05

Sequence Select

OPE06

PG Opt Missing

OPE08

Constant Selection

OPE10

V/f Ptrn Setting

RUN/Reference Command

Selection Error

The Reference Source Selection b1-01 and/or the RUN Source Selection parameter b1-02 are set to 3 (option board) but no option board is installed.

Option board is not installed or is installed incorrectly

Control method selection error

Verify that the board is installed.

Remove the power supply and reinstall the option board again

Recheck the setting of b1-01 and b1-02.

One of the control methods needing a

PG feedback was selected (A1-02 =3), but a PG option board is not installed.

Verify the control method selection in parameter A1-02 and/or the installation of the PG option board.

Function Selection Error

V/f Parameter Setting Error

A setting has been made that is applicable with the current control method.

Example: A function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V/f control.

Verify the control method and the function.

V/f parameter settings were out of range.

Check parameters (E1-). A frequency/voltage value may be set higher than the maximum frequency/voltage.

Cycle power to the Inverter.

ERR

EEPROM R/W Err

EEPROM write error

The NV-RAM data does not match the

EEPROM data.

A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.

Do a factory initialization (A1-03)

Auto-tuning Fault

Auto-tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts to stop. No fault or alarm outputs will be operated.

Display

Er - 01

Fault

Meaning

Table 6.24 Auto-tuning Fault

Probable causes

There is an error in the data input for autotuning.

Corrective Actions

Check the input data.

Motor data fault

There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current.

Check the Inverter and motor capacity.

There is an error between the no-load current setting and the input motor rated current (when auto-tuning for line-to-line resistance is performed for vector control)

Check the motor rated current and no-load current.

Check the input data.

Er - 02

Minor Fault

Alarm

Er - 03

STOP key

STOP key input

An alarm is detected during auto-tuning.

Check wiring and the machine.

Check the load.

The STOP key was pressed to cancel autotuning.

Er - 04

Resistance

Line-to-Line Resistance Fault

Er - 05

No-Load Current

Er - 08

Rated slip

No-Load Current Fault

Rated Slip Fault

Autotuning was not completed in the specified time.

The auto-tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.

• Check the input data.

• Check motor wiring.

• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.

• If the setting of T1-03 is higher than the Inverter input power supply voltage (E1-01), change the input data.

Er - 09

Accelerate

Er - 11

Motor Speed

Er - 12

I-det. Circuit

Acceleration Fault

Detected only for rotating auto-tuning

Motor speed Fault

Detected only for rotating autotuning

The motor did not accelerate in the specified time

• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration

Time 1).

• Increase L7-01 and L7-02

(Torque Limits) if they are low.

• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.

The torque reference exceed 100% during acceleration.

Detected when A1-02 = 2 or 3 (Vector control).

• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.

• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration

Time 1).

• Check the input data (particularly the number of PG pulses and the number of motor poles).

Current Detection Fault

The current exceeded the motor rated current.

Check wiring of the Inverter and the mounting.

Any of U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 has open-phase

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Display

Er - 13

Leakage Inductance Fault

End - 1

V/f Over Setting

End - 2

Saturation

End - 3

Rated FLA Alm

Meaning

Leakage Inductance Fault

Table 6.24 Auto-tuning Fault

Probable causes Corrective Actions

Auto-tuning was not completed in the specified time.

Check motor wiring.

Auto-tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.

V/f Settings Alarm

Displayed after auto-tuning is complete

The torque reference exceeded 100% and the no-load current exceeded 70% during auto-tuning.

Check and correct the motor settings

If the motor and the machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.

Motor Core Saturation Fault

Displayed after auto-tuning is complete.

Detected only for rotating autotuning

Rated Current Setting Alarm

Displayed after auto-tuning is complete

During auto-tuning, the measured values of motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1 and 2 (E2-07 and E2-08) exceeded its setting range. A temporary value was set: E2-07 = 0.75, E2-

08 = 0.50

Check the input data.

Check the motor wiring.

If the motor and the machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.

During auto-tuning, the measured value of motor rated current

(E2-01) was greater than the set value.

Check the motor rated current value.

Digital Operator Copy Function Faults

These faults can occur during the digital operator COPY function. When a fault occurs, the fault content is displayed on the operator. A fault does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output.

Function

READ

Function

COPY

Function

Verify

Function

Table 6.25 Digital Operator/Monitor Copy Function Faults

Digital Operator/Monitor

Display

Probable Causes

PRE

READ IMPOSSIBLE

Corrective Actions o3-01 was set to 1 to write parameter into the Digital Operator/Monitor when the Operator was write-protected (o3-02 = 0).

Set o3-02 to enable writing parameters into the

Operator’s memory.

IFE

READ DATA ERROR

RDE

DATA ERROR

CPE

ID UNMATCHED

VAE

INV. KVA UNMATCH

CRE

CONTROL

UNMATCHED

CYE

COPY ERROR

CSE

SUM CHECK ERROR

VYE

VERIFY ERROR

The data file read from the Inverter was of the wrong size indicating corrupted data.

An attempted writing of the Inverter data to the

Digital Operator/Monitor’s EEPROM failed.

The Inverter type or software number was different from the stored data in the digital operator

Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).

Check the Digital Operator/Monitor’s cable.

Replace the Digital Operator/Monitor.

A low Inverter voltage has been detected.

Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).

Replace the Digital Operator/Monitor.

Use stored data of the same product (L7) and software number (U1-14) only.

The capacity of the Inverter and the capacity of the stored data in the Digital Operator/Monitor are different.

Use stored data for the same Inverter capacity only (o2-04).

The control method of the Inverter and the control method of the stored data in the Digital Operator/

Monitor are different.

Use stored data for the same control method (A1-02).

A parameter setting written to the Inverter was different from the setting stored in the Digital

Operator/Monitor.

Upon completion of the COPY function, the

Inverter’s data checksum was different than the digital operator’s data checksum.

The set value of the digital operator and the

Inverter do not match

Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)

Retry the Verify function (o3-01 = 3)

Troubleshooting

Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and perform the appropriate countermeasures.

If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to

page 6-2, Protective and Diagnostic Functions

If A Parameter Cannot Be Set

Use the following information if a parameter cannot be set.

The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed.

The following causes are possible:

The Inverter is operating (drive mode).

There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn off the RUN command and then set the parameters

Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)

If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) settings are different, the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Enter the correct password in A1-04.

If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Shift/RESET key and the MENU key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then set the password and input the set password in parameter A1-04.

OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.

The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to

Table 6.23

in this chapter and correct the settings.

CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.

This is a Digital Operator/Monitor communication error. The connection between the Digital Operator/Monitor and the Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and then re-install it.

If the Motor Does Not Operate Properly

The following causes are possible:

The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.

The frequency reference is 0.00 Hz or a no speed is selected by the digital inputs. Check the input signals and the frequency reference settings.

Also make sure to set the Baseblock signal. The inverter does not accept any input if it is base blocked.

The load is too heavy

Check the motor current. If it is at the limit of the inverter rated current the load might be too high. Check the inverter size and the mechanical system. Check also if the brake is operating or not.

If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed

If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring may be incorrect. When the Inverter operates in the forward direction, the forward direction of the motor will depend on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the motor specification

The direction of the motor rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W. If using an encoder, the polarity will also have to be switched. If the Inverter is operated in V/f mode also parameter b1-

04 can be used to change the rotation direction.

If the Motor Stalls or Acceleration is Slow

The torque limit has been reached.

When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, the output torque will be limited according these settings. Therefore the motor may not develop enough torque to accelerate or the acceleration time might be very long.

The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.

If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be increased. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.

The stall prevention level during running is too low.

If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the motor speed and torque will be limited. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.

Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control

Vector control will not work properly if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set the motor parameters through calculations.

Troubleshooting

If Motor Deceleration is Slow

The following causes are possible:

The deceleration time is too long

The following causes are possible:

The deceleration time setting is too long.

Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).

Motor torque is insufficient.

If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power may be insufficient.

Consider increasing the motor and Inverter capacity.

The torque limit has been reached.

When a torque limit is reached (L7-01 to L7-04), the motor torque will be limited. This can cause the deceleration time to be extended. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.

If the Motor Overheats

The following causes are possible:

The load is too large.

If the motor load is too large and the torque exceeds the motor’s rated torque, the motor may overheat. Reduce the loads by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration/deceleration times. Also consider increasing the motor size.

The ambient temperature is too high.

The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to be within its acceptable range.

Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control

Vector control may not perform efficiently if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set the motor parameters through hand calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Mode Selection (A1-02) to

V/f Control (0 or 1).

If Peripheral Devices are Influenced by the Starting or Running Inverter

The following solutions are possible:

•

Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise.

•

Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's input power terminals.

Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's motor terminals.

Use shielded motor cables or a conduit. Metal shields electrical noise.

Check the grounding of the Inverter and motor.

Separate main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring.

If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running

The Inverter’s output is pulse modulated, i.e. the output voltage consists of high frequency pulses (PWM).

This high frequency signal causes a certain amount of leakage current which may cause the earth leakage breaker to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequencies countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help to some extent to lower the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02). In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.

Troubleshooting

If There is Mechanical Oscillation

Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration:

Oscillation and hunting occur with V/f control

The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01

(Torque Compensation Gain) and C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time). Decrease C4-01 carefully in steps of 0.05 and/or increase C4-02.

Furthermore the Slip Compensation Delay Time (C3-02) can be decreased.

Oscillation and hunting occur with Open Loop Vector control.

The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01

(Torque Compensation Gain), C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time Parameter) and C3-02 (Slip Compensation Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain parameters and raise the delay time parameters.

If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper performance may not be achieved for Vector Control. Perform auto-tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations.

Oscillation and hunting occur with Closed Loop Vector control

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the speed control loop (Automatic Speed Regulator, ASR) by changing C5- gain parameters. If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the ASR Delay Time, and then readjust the ASR gains.

If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper performance may not be achieved for Closed Loop Vector Control. Perform auto-tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations.

Maintenance and

Inspection

This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter

Maintenance and Inspection........................................7-2

-2

Maintenance and Inspection

Periodic Inspection

Check the following items during periodic maintenance.

•

The motor should not vibrate or make unusual noises.

•

There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Inverter or motor.

The ambient temperature should be within the Inverter’s specifications.

•

The output current value shown in U1-03 should not be higher than the motor or the Inverter rated current for extended period of time.

The cooling fan in the Inverter should be operating normally.

Before attempting any maintenance checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected. With power removed from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The Charge LED in the

Inverter will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10VDC. To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale. Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.

Item

External terminals Mounting bolts

Connectors

Table 7.1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied

Inspection

Are all screws and bolts tight?

Are connectors tight?

Corrective Procedure

Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.

Reconnect the loose connectors.

Cooling fins

All PCBs

Input Diodes

Output Transistors Power

Modules

Are the fins dirty or dusty?

Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the

PCBs?

Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the modules or components?

Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10

to 6 x 10

(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).

Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10

to 6 x 10

(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).

Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.

Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10

to 6 x 10

(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).

DC bus capacitors

Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?

Replace the capacitor or Inverter.

Apply power to the Inverter and conduct the following inspection:

Item

Cooling Fan(s)

Table 7.2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied

Inspection

Is there any abnormal noise or vibration, or has the total operating time exceeded 20,000 hours.

Check U1-40 for the elapsed cooling operation time.

Corrective Procedure

Replace Cooling Fan

Maintenance and Inspection

Periodic Maintenance of Parts

In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, and to prevent down time due to an unexpected failure, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life.

The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only. Periodic inspection standards vary depending on the Inverter’s installation environment conditions and usage. The Inverter’s suggested maintenance periods are noted below.

Table 7.3 Part Replacement Guidelines

Cooling fan(s)

DC bus capacitor

Part Standard Replacement Period

2 to 3 years (20,000 hours)

5 years

Replacement Method

Replace with new part.

(Determine need by inspection.)

Soft charge contactor

DC bus fuse

Control power fuse

–

10 years

Determine need by inspection.

Replace with new part.

PCB capacitors 5 years

Replace with new board.

(Determine need by inspection.)

Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:

Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30

°C/86°F

Load factor: 80% maximum

Operating rate: 12 hours maximum per day

Cooling Fan Replacement

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.

If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.

If the Inverter is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure, the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Inverter from the enclosure.

Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan.

2. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows “1“ and when pull the fan out in the direction of arrow „2“.

3. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector.

4. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in direction of arrows “3“ and remove the fan cover from the fan.

Power connector

Air flow direction

Fan cover

Fig 7.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)

Mounting the Cooling Fan

1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction is correct (see figure above).

2. Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover.

3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter heatsink.

Maintenance and Inspection

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More

The heatsink cooling fan is attached to the top of the heatsink inside the Inverter. The cooling fan(s) can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.

Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly.

2. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator/Monitor, and front cover from the Inverter.

3. Remove the control PCB (if necessary) bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board positioned near the top of the Inverter.

4. Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board positioned at the back of the Inverter.

5. Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Inverter.

6. Remove the cooling fan(s) from the fan assembly.

Mounting the Cooling Fan

After attaching the new cooling fan(s), reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.

When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the

Inverter.

Control card

Control card bracket

Air flow direction

Fan Assembly

Connector

Gate driver

Fig 7.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)

Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card

The Terminal Card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring.

Removing the Terminal Card

1. Remove the terminal cover, Digital Operator/Monitor and front cover.

2. Remove the wires connected to FE and/or NC on the terminal card.

3. Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card („1“) until they are free. It is not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are captive and self-rising.

4. Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow „2“.

Mounting the Terminal Card

Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.

Confirm that the terminal card and the control PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion.

The connector pins may be damaged if the terminal card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct

Inverter operation.

IMPORTANT

Fig 7.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card

Always confirm that the input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting the terminal card.

Specifications

This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter.

Standard Inverter Specifications..................................8-2

-2

Standard Inverter Specifications

The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.

Specifications by Model

Specifications are given by model in the following tables.

200V Class

Table 8.4 200 V Class Inverters

Model Number

CIMR-L7Z

Max. applicable motor output (kW)

Rated output capacity

(kVA)

Rated output current

(A)

Max. output voltage

(V)

Max. output frequency (Hz)

Rated voltage (V)

Rated frequency (Hz)

Rated input current

(A)

Allowable voltage fluctuation

23P7

3.7

17.5

25P5

5.5

27P5

7.5

2011

2018

18.5

3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC

(Proportional to input voltage.)

+ 10%, - 15%

2022

2030

130

3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

2015

Up to 120Hz available by programing.

68 96 115

156

2037

160

176

2045

183

220

2055

224

269

Allowable frequency fluctuation

±5%

Measures for power supply

DC reactor

12-pulse rectifica-

Optional

Not possible

Built In

Possible

* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.

* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.

Standard Inverter Specifications

400 V Class

Table 8.5 400 V Class Inverters

Model Number

CIMR-L7Z

Max. applicable motor output (kW)

Rated output capacity (kVA)

Rated output current

(A)

Max. output voltage

(V)

Max. output frequency (Hz)

Rated voltage (V)

Rated frequency (Hz)

Rated input current

(A)

Allowable voltage fluctuation

Allowable frequency fluctuation

Measures for power supply

DC reactor

12-phase rectifica-

43P7

3.7

8.5

10.2

44P0

4.0

13.2

45P5

5.5

47P5

7.5

4011

4015

4018

18.5

3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)

120 Hz max.

3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Optional

Not possible

32 41 49

+ 10%, - 15%

±5%

4022

4030

4037

Built In

Possible

4045

115

4055

106

128

154

* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the

Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.

* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse-rectification.

Common Specifications

The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V class Inverters.

Table 8.6 Common Specifications

Model Number

CIMR-L7Z

Specification

Control method

Sine wave PWM

Closed Loop Vector control, Open Loop Vector control, V/f control

Carrier Frequency

Speed control range

Speed control accuracy

Speed control response

Torque limits

Torque accuracy

Frequency range

Frequency accuracy

(temperature characteristics)

8 kHz higher carrier frequency possible with current derating.

1:40 (V/f control)

1:100 (Open Loop Vector control)

1:1000 (Closed Loop Vector control)

± 3% (V/f control)

± 0.2% (Open Loop Vector control)

± 0.02% (Closed Loop Vector control)

(25

°C ± 10°C)

5 Hz (control without PG)

30 Hz (control with PG)

Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.) (Vector control)

± 5%

0.01 to 120 Hz

Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10

°C to +40°C)

Analog references: ± 0.1% (25

°C ±10°C)

Frequency setting resolution

Digital references: 0.01 Hz

Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (11 bits plus sign)

Output frequency resolution

Overload capacity and maximum current

Frequency setting signal

Acceleration/Deceleration time

0.01 Hz

150% of rated output current for 30 sec.

0 to +10V

0.01 to 600.00 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration time settings)

Main control functions

Overtorque/undertorque detection, torque limits, 8-speed control (maximum), 4 acceleration and deceleration times, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, auto-tuning (rotational or stationary), dwell function, cooling fan ON/

OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, auto-restart after fault, DC braking for starting and stopping, automatic fault reset and parameter copy function, special Lift functions and sequences, short floor, hardware baseblock

Standard Inverter Specifications

Model Number

CIMR-L7Z

Motor protection

Instantaneous overcurrent protection

Fuse blown protection

Overload protection

Overvoltage protection

Undervoltage protection

Cooling fin overheating

Stall prevention

Grounding protection

Charge indicator

Protective structure

Ambient operating temperature

Ambient operating humidity

Storage temperature

Application site

Altitude

Vibration

Table 8.6 Common Specifications

Specification

Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.

Stops at approximately 200% of rated output current.

Stops for fuse blown.

OL2 fault at 150% of rated output current for 30 sec

200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.

400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.

200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.

400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.

Protection by thermistor.

Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently.

Protection by electronic circuits.

Glows when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 10 VDC or more.

Enclosed wall-mounted type (IP20): All models

Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)

Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)

-–10

°C to 45°C

95% max. (with no condensation)

- 20

°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)

Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)

1000 m max.

10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s

max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s

max

Appendix

This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.

Inverter Application Precautions ..................................9-2

Motor Application Precautions .....................................9-4

User Constants ............................................................9-5

-2

Inverter Application Precautions

Selection

Observe the following precautions when selecting an Inverter.

Installing Reactors

A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a compensating capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the converter section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor to improve the power supply power factor.

If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or

AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.

Power supply

(kVA)

DC or AC reactor required

DC or AC reactor not required

Inverter capacity (kVA)

Fig 9.4

Installation

Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.

Installation in Enclosures

Install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist, dust, and other contaminants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not exceed the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.

Installation Direction

Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface.

Settings

Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.

Upper Limits

The maximum output frequency can be set up to 120Hz. Setting the output frequency too high can damage the machine. So pay attention to the mechanical system and observe required limits for the output frequency.

Inverter Application Precautions

DC Injection Braking

If the DC Injection Braking Current or the Braking Time are set too high the motor can overheat what can damage the motor

Acceleration/Deceleration Times

The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD

/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time.

To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.

Handling

Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.

Wiring Check

The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.

Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and control sequences carefully.

Magnetic Contactor Installation

If a magnetic contactor is installed in the power supply line do not exceed one start per hour. Switching more often can damage the inrush current prevention circuit.

Maintenance and Inspections

After turning OFF the main circuit power supply it can take several minutes before the DC bus is discharged completely. The CHARGE LED, indicating if the DC bus is charged, glows above a voltage of 10VD.

-4

Motor Application Precautions

Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor

Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.

Low Speed Ranges

If a standard cooled motor is used at low speed the cooling effects are diminished. If the motor is used in constant torque applications in low speed area the motor may overheat. If full torque is required at low speed continuously an externally cooled motor must be used.

Installation Withstand Voltage

If the inverter is used with an input voltage of 440 V or higher and long motor cables, voltage spikes at the motor terminals may occur which can damage the motor windings. Please ensure that the motor insulation class is sufficient.

Noise

The noise generated in the motor depends on the carrier frequency. The higher the setting the less the generated noise is.

Using the Inverter for Special Motors

Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.

Pole-changing Motor

The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select an appropriate

Inverter according to the maximum current of the motor.

Single-phase Motor

Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase capacitor motor. Any capacitors directly connected to the inverter output may damage the Inverter.

User Constants

Factory settings are given in the following table. These are factory settings for a 200 V Class Inverter with

3.7 kW (open loop vector control).

Table 9.7 User Constants

No.

Name

C1-06

C1-07

C1-08

C1-09

C1-10

C1-11

C2-01

C2-02

C2-03 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04

C1-01

C1-02

C1-03

C1-04

C1-05 b2-08 b4-01 b4-02 b6-01 b1-01 b1-02 b1-06 b1-08

A1-00 Language selection for Digital Operator display

A1-01 Parameter access level

A1-02 Control method selection

A1-03 Initialize

A1-04 Password

A1-05 Password setting

A2-01 to

A2-32

User specified parameters

Reference source selection

RUN command source selection

Control input scan

Run command selection in programming modes

Magnetic flux compensation volume

Timer function ON-delay time

Timer function OFF-delay time

Dwell frequency at start

Dwell time at start

Dwell frequency at stop

Dwell time at stop

Acceleration time 1

Deceleration time 1

Acceleration time 2

Deceleration time 2

Acceleration time 3

Deceleration time 3

Acceleration time 4

Deceleration time 4

Emergency stop time

Accel/decel time setting unit

Accel/decel time switching frequency

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start

1.5 s

0.0 Hz

0.5 s

Setting

Factory

Setting

–

0.0 s

0.0 Hz

0.0 s

0.0 Hz

0.0 s

10.0 s

No.

C2-04

C2-05

C3-01

C3-02

C3-03

C3-04

C3-05

C4-01

C4-02

C4-03

C4-04

C4-05

C5-01

C5-02

C5-03

C5-04 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09

C5-06

C5-07

C5-08

C5-09

C5-10

C6-02 d1-01 d1-02 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13

Table 9.7 User Constants

Name

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end

S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed

Slip compensation gain

Slip compensation delay time

Slip compensation limit

Slip compensation selection during regeneration

Output voltage limit operation selection

Torque compensation gain

Torque compensation delay time constant

Starting torque compensation (FWD)

Starting torque compensation (REV)

Starting torque compensation time constant

ASR proportional (P) gain 1

ASR integral (I) time 1

ASR proportional (P) gain 2

ASR integral (I) time 2

ASR delay time

ASR switching frequency

ASR integral (I) limit

ASR proportional (P) gain 3

ASR integral (I) time 3

Carrier frequency selection

Frequency reference 1

Frequency reference 2

Frequency reference 3

Frequency reference 4

Frequency reference 5

Frequency reference 6

Frequency reference 7

Frequency reference 8

Frequency reference 9 Vn

Frequency reference 10 V

Frequency reference 11 V

Frequency reference 12 V

Frequency reference 13 V r

0.5

0.004 ms

0.0 Hz

400%

40.00

0.500 s

0.00 Hz

50.00 Hz

0.00 Hz

Factory

Setting

0.5 s

0.50 s

1.0

2000 ms

200%

1.00

200 ms

0.0%

10 ms

0.00 Hz

Setting

User Constants

No.

E2-11

F1-01

F1-02

F1-03

F1-04

F1-05

F1-06

F1-08

F1-09

F1-10

F1-11

F1-14

F4-01

E2-03

E2-04

E2-05

E2-06

E2-07

E2-08

E2-09

E2-10

E1-06

E1-07

E1-08

E1-09

E1-10

E1-13

E2-01

E2-02 d6-06

E1-01

E1-04

E1-05 d1-14 d1-17 d1-18 d6-03

Table 9.7 User Constants

Name

Frequency reference 14 Inspection

Jog frequency reference / Leveling speed

Speed priority selection

Field forcing function selection

Field forcing function Limit

Input voltage setting

Max. output frequency (FMAX)

Max. output voltage (VMAX)

Base frequency (FA)

Mid. output frequency (FB)

Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)

Min. output frequency (FMIN)

Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)

Base voltage (VBASE)

Motor rated current

Motor rated slip

Motor no-load current

Number of motor poles

Motor line-to-line resistance

Motor leak inductance

Motor iron saturation coefficient 1

Motor iron saturation coefficient 2

Monitor mechanical losses

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

Motor rated output power

PG constant

Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)

Operation selection at overspeed (OS)

Operation selection at deviation

PG rotation

PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)

Overspeed detection level

Overspeed detection delay time

Excessive speed deviation detection level

Excessive speed deviation detection delay time

PG open-circuit detection delay time

Channel 1 monitor selection

1024

4 poles

0.50

0.75

0.0%

115%

0.0 s

10%

0.5 s

1.0 s

50.0 Hz

0.0 V

Factory

Setting

25 Hz

4.00 Hz

400%

50.0 Hz

Setting

No.

H1-03

H1-04

H1-05

H2-01

H2-02

H2-03

H3-01

H3-02

H3-03

H3-04

H3-05

H3-06

H3-07

F6-01

F6-02

F6-03

F6-04

F6-05

F6-06

H1-01

H1-02

F5-02

F5-03

F5-04

F5-05

F5-06

F5-07

F5-08

F5-09

F4-02

F4-03

F4-04

F4-05

F4-06

F4-07

F4-08

F5-01

Table 9.7 User Constants

Name

Channel 1 gain

Channel 2 monitor selection

Channel 2 gain

Channel 1 output monitor bias

Channel 2 output monitor bias

Analog output signal level for channel 1

Analog output signal level for channel 2

Channel 1 output selection

Channel 2 output selection

Channel 3 output selection

Channel 4 output selection

Channel 5 output selection

Channel 6 output selection

Channel 7 output selection

Channel 8 output selection

DO-08 output mode selection

Operation selection after communications error

Input level of external error from Communications Option Card

Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card

Trace sampling from Communications Option Card

Current monitor unit selection

Torque reference/torque limit selection from communications option card

Terminal S3 function selection

Terminal S4 function selection

Terminal S5 function selection

Terminal S6 function selection

Terminal S7 function selection

Terminal M1-M2 function selection

Terminal M3-M4 function selection

Terminal M5-M6 function selection

Frequency reference AI-14B CH1signal level selection

Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input gain

Frequency referenceAI-14B CH1 input bias

AI-14B CH3 signal level selection

AI-14B CH3 function selection

AI-14B CH3 input gain

AI-14B CH3 input bias

100.0%

0.0%

100.0%

0.0%

Factory

Setting

100.0%

50.0%

0.0%

Setting

User Constants

Table 9.7 User Constants

No.

Name

L6-01

L6-02

L6-03

L6-04

L6-05

L6-06

L7-01

L7-02

L4-01

L4-02

L4-03

L4-04

L4-05

L4-06

L5-01

L5-02

L7-03

L7-04

L7-06

L7-07

L1-01

L1-02

L2-05

L2-11

L3-01

L3-02

L3-05

L3-06

H3-08 AI-14B CH2 signal level selection

H3-09 AI-14B CH2 function selection

H3-10 AI-14B CH2 input gain

H3-11 AI-14B CH2 input bias

H3-12 Analog input filter time constant for the AI-14B

H3-15 Terminal A1 function selection

H3-16 Terminal A1 input gain

H3-17 Terminal A1 input bias

Motor protection selection

Motor protection time constant

Undervoltage detection level

Battery Voltage

Stall prevention selection during accel

Stall prevention level during accel

Stall prevention selection during running

Stall prevention level during running

Speed agreement detection level

Speed agreement detection width

Speed agreement detection level (+/-)

Speed agreement detection width (+/-)

Operation when frequency reference is missing

Frequency reference value at frequency reference loss

Number of auto restart attempts

Auto restart operation selection

Torque detection selection 1

Torque detection level 1

Torque detection time 1

Torque detection selection 2

Torque detection level 2

Torque detection time 2

Forward drive torque limit

Reverse drive torque limit

Forward regenerative torque limit

Reverse regenerative torque limit

Torque limit time constant

Torque Limit Operation during accel/decel

150%

0.1 s

300%

150%

0.1 s

300%

200 ms

150%

0.0 Hz

2.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

2.0 Hz

80%

0.0%

1.0 min

190 V

150%

Factory

Setting

100.0%

0.0%

0.03 s

100.0%

Setting

No.

L8-02 o2-12 o2-15 o3-01 o3-02 o2-07 o2-08 o2-09 o2-10 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o1-03 o1-04 o1-05 o2-02

S1-02

S1-03

S1-04

L8-20

N2-01

N2-02

N5-01

N5-02

N5-03 o1-01 o1-02

L8-03

L8-05

L8-07

L8-09

L8-10

L8-11

L8-12

L8-18

Table 9.7 User Constants

Name

Overheat pre-alarm level

Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm

Input open-phase protection selection

Output open-phase protection selection

Ground protection selection

Cooling fan control selection

Cooling fan control delay time

Ambient temperature

Soft CLA selection

LF detection time

Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain

Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant

Feed forward control selection

Motor Accel Time

Feed forward proportional gain

Monitor selection

Monitor selection after power up

Frequency units of reference setting and monitor

Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/f characteristics

LCD Display contrast adjustment

STOP key during control circuit terminal operation

User parameter initial value kVA selection

Frequency reference setting method selection

Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected

Cumulative operation time setting

Cumulative operation time selection

Initialize Mode

Fan operation time setting

Fault trace initialize

“No of Travels” monitor initialize

Copy function selection

Read permission selection

DC injection braking current at start

DC injection braking current at stop

DC injection braking time at start

0 hr

0 hr.

50%

0.30 sec

45 °C

0.2sec

1.00

50 ms

0.178 s

1.00

Factory

Setting

75 °C

60 s

Setting

User Constants

Table 9.7 User Constants

No.

Name

T1-03

T1-04

T1-05

T1-06

T1-07

T1-08

T1-09

S1-27

S2-01

S2-02

S2-03

S2-07

S3-01

T1-01

T1-02

S1-19

S1-20

S1-21

S1-22

S1-23

S1-24

S1-25

S1-26

S1-05

S1-06

S1-07

S1-14

S1-15

S1-16

S1-17

S1-18

DC injection braking time at stop

Brake release delay time

Brake close delay time

SE2 detection delay time

SE3 detection delay time

Run delay time

DC injection current gain at regenerative operation

DC injection current gain at motoring operation

Output contactor open delay time

Zero servo gain

Zero servo completion width

Starting torque compensation increase time

Torque compensation gain during lowering

Torque compensation bias during raising

Torque compensation bias during lowering

Dwell speed at start reference

Door zone speed level

Motor rated speed

Slip compensation gain in motoring mode

Slip compensation gain in regenerative mode

Slip compensation delay time

Short floor operation selection

Autotuning mode selection

Motor output power

Motor rated voltage

Motor rated current

Motor base frequency

Number of motor poles

Motor base speed

Number of PG pulses

Motor no-load current

* The factory setting depends on the inverter model and the control method.

60.0 Hz

4 poles

1450 r/min

1024

E2-03 value

0.0Hz

1380 rpm

0.7

1.0

200ms

20%

0.10sec

500ms

1.000

0.0%

Factory

Setting

0.60

0.20

0.10

200ms

0.10sec

100%

Setting

โฆษณา